en_tn/tn_ACT.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	mw28				0	Introduction to Acts Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Acts The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7) The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31) The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24) Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5) The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20) Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31) Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part. What is the book of Acts about? The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.” Who wrote the book of Acts? The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke. Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts. Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What is the church? The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution. The kingdom of God The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts “to the same” The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing. “in/to/into the temple” Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts? The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book. First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are: Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’” Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.” Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are: Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.” Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.” Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.” Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”). Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.” Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1:intro	vyg9				0	Acts 1 General Notes Structure and formatting The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20. Special concepts in this chapter The Ascension This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]]) Baptism Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in 1:5. In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in 2:4. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God” Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in 1:3, he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Long sentence As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of 1:1 to the end of 1:3. ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. The details of the death of Judas There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death. It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it. But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in 1:18 that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. The 12 disciples There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts. All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known. Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in 1:13 instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
4	1:1	q9ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην	1	Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by the first account he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5	1:1	a000			ὦ Θεόφιλε	1	Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
6	1:1	ryj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θεόφιλε	1	Theophilus is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7	1:1	a001		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	Luke is using the word began to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
8	1:1	a002		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9	1:2	a003		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας	1	While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10	1:2	n435		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11	1:2	a424		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνελήμφθη	1	Luke is referring to Jesus being taken up into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12	1:3	a004			οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
13	1:3	dup3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν	1	This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14	1:3	a005		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	The word translated proofs describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15	1:3	yc16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων	1	While the antecedent of whom is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16	1:3	a006		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17	1:4	a007		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb depart. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
18	1:4	vb7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι	1	The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
19	1:4	a008		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἱεροσολύμων	1	Jerusalem is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20	1:4	sg4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Jesus is referring figuratively to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a promise to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21	1:4	a009		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
22	1:4	tj6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου	1	In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23	1:4	d3kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἠκούσατέ	1	Here, you is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In 1:6, “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether you is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
24	1:5	uu4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωάννης	1	John is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
25	1:5	fnq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1	Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26	1:5	a075		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27	1:5	dzj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and if your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28	1:5	a010		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας	1	Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
29	1:6	n9wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν	1	In the first instance, they describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, they refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in 1:8 apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
30	1:6	a011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
31	1:6	f7uj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32	1:6	a252		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	Israel is the name of a nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
33	1:7	a012		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι	1	Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34	1:7	y1fu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς	1	The words times and seasons could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
35	1:7	a013		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
36	1:7	a014		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word authority, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
37	1:8	ld4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες	1	Jesus is using the word translated and to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
38	1:8	a015		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δύναμιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word power, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
39	1:8	a016		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰερουσαλὴμ & Ἰουδαίᾳ & Σαμαρείᾳ	1	Jerusalem is the name of a city, and Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
40	1:8	vb4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
41	1:9	e1q1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλεπόντων αὐτῶν	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of looking. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
42	1:9	l1cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπήρθη	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
43	1:9	ug58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	Luke is using the eyes of the apostles figuratively to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
44	1:10	enu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated heaven here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
45	1:10	a017		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these two men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
46	1:10	a018		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
47	1:10	a019		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄνδρες δύο	1	These were actually angels. Luke calls them men because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
48	1:10	a020			ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς	1	In this context, the word white likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
49	1:11	a021		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἳ & εἶπαν	1	This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
50	1:11	a022		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs	οἳ & εἶπαν	1	If you retain the word they in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
51	1:11	gpg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
52	1:11	a023		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Galileans are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
53	1:11	a024		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
54	1:11	a025		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
55	1:11	a026		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν	1	In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated heaven likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
56	1:11	a027		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
57	1:11	cue7			ὃν τρόπον	1	Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
58	1:12	x2nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑπέστρεψαν	1	The word they refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
59	1:12	a028		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
60	1:12	a029		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	Olivet is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
61	1:12	a030		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
62	1:12	p19g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	The journey of a Sabbath was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
63	1:13	vis2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε εἰσῆλθον	1	The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
64	1:13	zt12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression upper chamber describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
65	1:13	a031		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πέτρος & Ἰωάννης & Ἰάκωβος & Ἀνδρέας & Φίλιππος & Θωμᾶς & Βαρθολομαῖος & Μαθθαῖος	1	These are the names of eight men. The name James is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Jacob. Some translators prefer to use the Hebrew form of the name for this man and for other men in the New Testament with the same name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
66	1:13	a032		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου	1	These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
67	1:13	a033		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάκωβος & Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου	1	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
68	1:13	a034		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς	1	Simon is the name of a man, and Zealot is another name by which he was known. (1) Zealot could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) Zealot could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
69	1:14	z6cf			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
70	1:14	a035		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γυναιξὶν	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in Luke 8:2–3 and 23:49. Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
71	1:14	a036		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρία	1	Mary is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
72	1:14	a037		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
73	1:15	il8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
74	1:15	cup2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
75	1:15	a038		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
76	1:15	liz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
77	1:15	a039		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
78	1:15	tl5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι	1	Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
79	1:15	a040		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὄχλος ὀνομάτων	1	Luke is using the term names figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
80	1:15	a041			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
81	1:16	a042		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
82	1:16	a043		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
83	1:16	a044		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	If you decide to retain the metaphor of brothers, you could show that Peter is using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
84	1:16	a045		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this scripture before his statement that it had to be fulfilled. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
85	1:16	i8tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
86	1:16	a046			προεῖπε	1	Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
87	1:16	f3um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ	1	Peter is using the word mouth figuratively to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in 1:20. Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
88	1:16	a047		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δαυεὶδ & Ἰούδα	1	David and Judas are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
89	1:16	a048		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	Peter is using the act of guiding the ones arresting Jesus to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
90	1:17	q73y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Peter uses the word For to introduce the reason for a result that is described in 1:21–22, after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in 1:16. The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
91	1:17	a049		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
92	1:17	a050			κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Peter is using the term numbered in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
93	1:17	a051		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
94	1:17	tmv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word us to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that us is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
95	1:17	a052		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in 1:18–19. The quotation resumes in 1:20. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
96	1:18	tmv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	μὲν οὖν	1	Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
97	1:18	dd58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	Luke is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
98	1:18	a053		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word unrighteousness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
99	1:18	w83j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	Luke is using the term unrighteousness figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
100	1:18	kg3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
101	1:18	a054			πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	The word headfirst describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
102	1:18	a055		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	1:19	a056			γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The verb form is not passive here, since known is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make it the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
104	1:19	a057		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
105	1:19	a058		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
106	1:19	mxf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἁκελδαμάχ	1	Akeldama is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, Field of Blood. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
107	1:20	mz13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
108	1:20	d7pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
109	1:20	ip5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
110	1:20	g30d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
111	1:20	crk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
112	1:20	hiul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
113	1:20	mc45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
114	1:20	chq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	The word habitation likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
115	1:20	a059			τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	The word overseership refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in 1 Timothy 3:1. Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
116	1:20	uctm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
117	1:20	jdsg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
118	1:20	elz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
119	1:21	t916		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
120	1:21	xz69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς	1	In the first instance of us, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of us, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
121	1:21	zuf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
122	1:22	qb8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word baptism, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
123	1:22	a060		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωάννου	1	John is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in 1:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
124	1:22	a061		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς	1	While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific day, Peter may be using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
125	1:22	a062		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun he refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun his also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
126	1:22	yi3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
127	1:22	a063		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν	1	When Peter says from us, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says with us, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
128	1:22	mrx7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἕνα τούτων	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
129	1:22	g3n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
130	1:23	lz7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔστησαν δύο	1	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
131	1:23	a064		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἔστησαν δύο	1	Luke is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
132	1:23	a065		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔστησαν δύο	1	When the believers stood up these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
133	1:23	a066		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος	1	Joseph is the name of a man, and Barsabbas and Justus are two other names by which he was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. Justus is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
134	1:23	s1ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
135	1:23	a067		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαθθίαν	1	Matthias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
136	1:24	a068		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
137	1:24	a069		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	Together the words praying and said indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
138	1:24	zd1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
139	1:24	a070			σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
140	1:24	se6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
141	1:24	a071		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	σὺ Κύριε	1	The word you is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
142	1:24	a072		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα	1	The person who is praying is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
143	1:25	mg47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς	1	The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word apostleship identifies what kind of ministry this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
144	1:25	ryv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας	1	The expression turned aside figuratively means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
145	1:25	tx6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον	1	This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
146	1:26	a073		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
147	1:26	r84c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun they refers to the believers and the pronoun them refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun them and if your language marks the dual form, them would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
148	1:26	a074		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	The term lots describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
149	1:26	w4ph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
150	1:26	fk4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνκατεψηφίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
151	2:intro	x8fr				0	Acts 2 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31. Special concepts in this chapter Pentecost The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years. Tongues Luke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.” Last days In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) The prophecy of Joel In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) Baptize In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) Wonders and signs These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter “You killed” (2:23) The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this. Long sentences There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. Poetry The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
152	2:1	i4sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
153	2:1	a076		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
154	2:1	a425		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
155	2:1	x075		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Pentecost is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
156	2:1	i4sb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ	1	Here the word they refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
157	2:1	a077			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
158	2:2	qjc3			ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	The word translated heaven could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from heaven itself.
159	2:2	a078		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
160	2:2	jec5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
161	2:2	a079		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it filled the house. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
162	2:2	t4y4			ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	Luke may be using the word translated house in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
163	2:2	a080		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι	1	Luke may be using the term sitting idiomatically to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
164	2:3	re3t			γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός	1	This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in Isaiah 5:24, for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
165	2:3	xtk4			διαμεριζόμεναι	1	This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
166	2:3	a081		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun they refers to the objects, and the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
167	2:3	a082		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	Luke is using the word sat figuratively to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
168	2:4	v7hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
169	2:4	a251		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
170	2:4	a083		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	Luke is using the word began to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
171	2:4	nr9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	The implication, as 2:6–11 makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
172	2:4	a084			καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	Here, giving has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
173	2:4	a085			καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	The word translated to speak out means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
174	2:5	dz1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
175	2:5	yft2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	Luke is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
176	2:5	stq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	παντὸς ἔθνους	1	The word every is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
177	2:5	a086		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
178	2:6	bpj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεχύθη	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
179	2:6	u9hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them refers to the believers and the pronoun his refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
180	2:7	m8kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	The terms amazed and marveling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
181	2:7	a087		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	The expression were … amazed is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
182	2:7	a088		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
183	2:7	wnk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
184	2:7	a089		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαλιλαῖοι	1	See how you translated the name Galileans in 1:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
185	2:8	hzm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?	1	The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you can translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
186	2:8	a090		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	The speakers are using the word translated And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
187	2:8	a091		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of hearing. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
188	2:8	a092		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν	1	The speakers are using the words we and our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
189	2:8	wb5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	The speakers say figuratively that they were born in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
190	2:8	a093		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
191	2:9	f1ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται	1	These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
192	2:9	dm23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν; & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν	1	These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
193	2:10	tmb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης	1	These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
194	2:10	a094		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κυρήνην	1	Cyrene is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
195	2:10	a095		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι	1	Here, Romans is a name for people who are from the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “visitors from Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
196	2:11	w8jy			Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι	1	The term proselytes describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase both Jews and proselytes could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in 2:9–11. Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
197	2:11	jnp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες	1	These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
198	2:11	a096			γλώσσαις	1	As in 2:4, here the word tongues has the specific sense of “languages.” Alternate translation: “languages”
199	2:11	a097		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The speakers are using the adjective great as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
200	2:12	el2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	The words amazed and perplexed mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
201	2:12	a098		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες	1	These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
202	2:12	a099		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
203	2:13	a100		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
204	2:13	fg59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
205	2:13	jj1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	γλεύκους	1	This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
206	2:14	k5hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Peter stood to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
207	2:14	c919		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἕνδεκα	1	Luke is using the adjective eleven as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
208	2:14	d9tb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς	1	The idiom raised up his voice means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
209	2:14	a102		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
210	2:14	a103		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
211	2:14	a104		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες	1	This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
212	2:14	ei5j			τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
213	2:14	hal2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
214	2:14	brjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective known expresses the result of action by a different agent (you), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
215	2:14	a105		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Peter uses the word translated and to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
216	2:14	qp16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term ears figuratively to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
217	2:15	a106		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Peter says for in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
218	2:15	a107		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1	The demonstrative pronoun these refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
219	2:15	a108		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	Peter says for in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
220	2:15	a109			ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
221	2:15	h28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
222	2:15	a110		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
223	2:16	f9hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
224	2:16	ktw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
225	2:17	a111		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	The material in 2:17–21 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase God says to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
226	2:17	a112		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
227	2:17	ijl8			καὶ ἔσται	1	Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
228	2:17	a113			ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις	1	See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
229	2:17	u2d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	God says figuratively that he will pour out his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
230	2:17	a114		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	God refers figuratively to flesh to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
231	2:17	a115		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται	1	If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
232	2:17	a116		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὑμῶν	-1	If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of your as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
233	2:17	a117		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	God speaks separately of sons and daughters in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between young and old. So the word men could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
234	2:18	uwd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
235	2:18	nd34			ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου	1	If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
236	2:18	a118		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	Here, days idiomatically means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
237	2:18	wz2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	See how you translated this in 2:17. Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
238	2:19	a119		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ δώσω	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
239	2:19	a120			δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα	1	Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
240	2:19	a121			ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω	1	Since God specifies in the next verse that these wonders will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated heaven likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
241	2:19	p5zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ	1	Here the possessive form describes vapor that looks smoky or that has smoke in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
242	2:20	ylv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
243	2:20	a6yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
244	2:20	a122		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the sun into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
245	2:20	a123		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word darkness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
246	2:20	a124		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
247	2:20	a125		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
248	2:20	f34k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the moon into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
249	2:20	swb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	The words great and remarkable mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
250	2:20	lc4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
251	2:20	a126		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
252	2:21	a127		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
253	2:21	a128			καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς	1	Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
254	2:21	vql5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
255	2:21	a129		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται	1	Here, call on is an idiom. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
256	2:21	a130		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
257	2:21	a131		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
258	2:21	a132		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
259	2:21	a133		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	σωθήσεται	1	This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
260	2:22	sa78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
261	2:22	g6vj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
262	2:22	a134		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον	1	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
263	2:22	f2t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
264	2:22	a135		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις	1	The terms mighty works, wonders, and signs mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
265	2:23	a136		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
266	2:23	i6un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον	1	The term translated given up is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
267	2:23	s38b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words counsel and foreknowledge, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
268	2:23	a137		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word determined is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
269	2:23	f5kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνείλατε	1	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
270	2:23	e38a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων	1	Here, hand refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
271	2:23	a138		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀνόμων	1	Peter is using the adjective lawless as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
272	2:23	f6kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνόμων	1	By lawless, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is figuratively describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
273	2:23	a197			προσπήξαντες	1	This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
274	2:24	a140			ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
275	2:24	ei37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
276	2:24	s8j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	Peter speaks figuratively of the agonies of death as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
277	2:24	a141		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	Peter uses the possessive form to describe death as something that is characterized by agonies. Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
278	2:24	a142		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was not possible. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
279	2:24	ykq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
280	2:24	vuf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Peter speaks of death figuratively as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
281	2:25	dd5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from Psalm 16:8–11.) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
282	2:25	a143		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	The pronoun him refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns I and my are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
283	2:25	a144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Peter uses the word For to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
284	2:25	a145		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν	1	Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what David says in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
285	2:25	n2ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιόν μου	1	The phrase before me, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
286	2:25	tqak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1	The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
287	2:25	a146		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	Here the adjective right is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
288	2:25	l6xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	In this context, to be at someone’s right side figuratively means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
289	2:25	a147		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	Here, moved means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so figuratively it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
290	2:25	s4yp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
291	2:26	a148		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
292	2:26	z8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
293	2:26	a149		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου	1	Here, the tongue figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
294	2:26	zz6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	Here, flesh figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
295	2:26	a150		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word hope, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
296	2:26	a151		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
297	2:26	a152		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what hope the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
298	2:27	m3ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
299	2:27	a153		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than nor in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
300	2:27	whi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου	1	The words you and your are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in 1:24 in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
301	2:27	a154		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	The Messiah says my soul figuratively to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
302	2:27	a155		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	Hades is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
303	2:27	a156		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
304	2:27	rld3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
305	2:27	a157		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
306	2:27	l5cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
307	2:28	a158		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
308	2:28	a159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	ἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου	1	The words you and your are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in 1:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
309	2:28	xhi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς	1	The Messiah speaks figuratively of life as if it consisted of paths that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word known refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
310	2:28	ej5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης	1	The Messiah speaks figuratively as if he were a container that God could fill with gladness. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
311	2:28	y7gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	Here, the word face figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
312	2:28	a161		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
313	2:29	pv1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
314	2:29	ps7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
315	2:29	wh97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ	1	A patriarch is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term figuratively to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
316	2:29	vtc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
317	2:29	a162		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης	1	Peter is using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
318	2:30	a163		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Peter uses the word Therefore to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
319	2:30	a164		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς	1	Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
320	2:30	x11q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is using the word loins figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word fruit in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
321	2:30	hq71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	When Peter says that God promised to set one of David’s descendants upon his throne, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
322	2:31	a165		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ	1	The first instance of he refers to David, and the second instance of he and the pronoun his refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
323	2:31	a166		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
324	2:31	tn4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
325	2:31	a167		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Christ is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
326	2:31	a168		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ᾍδην	1	See how you translated the term Hades in 2:27. Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
327	2:31	a169		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
328	2:31	a170		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Peter is using the word flesh figuratively to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
329	2:31	up5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
330	2:32	udn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
331	2:32	kw6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	By we, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
332	2:33	a171		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word Therefore. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
333	2:33	kij2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
334	2:33	c9mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
335	2:33	a172		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
336	2:33	a173		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου	1	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
337	2:33	a174		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
338	2:33	c1dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξέχεεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
339	2:33	wsg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέχεεν	1	Peter says figuratively that Jesus has poured out the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in 2:17, to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
340	2:34	m7fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	The material in 2:34–35 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David (Psalm 110:1), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
341	2:34	i8wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord means God here, and my Lord means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
342	2:34	a175		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Here the adjective right is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
343	2:34	kvn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
344	2:35	nf1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	The psalm says figuratively that God would make the Messiah’s enemies a stool for his feet to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
345	2:35	a176		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
346	2:36	a177		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
347	2:36	msqt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
348	2:36	tgbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
349	2:36	pnp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
350	2:37	s85q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
351	2:37	xan1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here the word they refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
352	2:37	w1ma			κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of heart. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
353	2:37	l15x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Luke is speaking figuratively. The people were not literally pierced in the heart by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
354	2:37	zls6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
355	2:37	a178		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
356	2:37	a179		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τί ποιήσωμεν	1	The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
357	2:38	a180		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	μετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε	1	The words you and your are plural, you will receive is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative Repent is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative be baptized is singular, since the subject is each. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
358	2:38	cmb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθήτω	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
359	2:38	geb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah 2:36. He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So in the name here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
360	2:38	a181		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
361	2:39	a182		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in 2:33. Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
362	2:39	a183		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	Peter showed the people in 2:17 that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
363	2:39	a184		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	Peter could also be using the word children in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
364	2:39	v8vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν	1	Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in 11:18. So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
365	2:39	a185		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	By the Lord our God, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
366	2:39	a186		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἂν προσκαλέσηται	1	Peter is using the word call in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
367	2:40	a187		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν	1	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
368	2:40	v6ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς	1	Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word urged tells in what way Peter testified further about faith in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
369	2:40	a188		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σώθητε	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
370	2:40	wtd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	The implication is that God is going to punish this perverse generation. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
371	2:40	a189		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	The word perverse describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this generation rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
372	2:41	k1kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	οὖν	1	Luke uses the word Therefore to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
373	2:41	r9qz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	Here, received means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
374	2:41	a190		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
375	2:41	kz64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
376	2:41	sv5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ψυχαὶ	1	Luke is using one part of these people, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
377	2:41	a47f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθησαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
378	2:42	a191		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words teaching and fellowship, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
379	2:42	gc59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	Luke could be using the word breaking to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
380	2:42	a192		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	By the breaking of bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
381	2:43	a193		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
382	2:43	gi9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Luke is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
383	2:43	a194		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Luke says every as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
384	2:43	ys3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	Since Luke says that these things happened through the apostles, the implication is that God was doing them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make God the subject of this sentence and wonders and signs the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
385	2:43	q6dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
386	2:44	u8qk			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
387	2:44	jy2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά	1	Luke may be saying all as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
388	2:45	h8tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον	1	The words properties and possessions mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
389	2:45	f74s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ	1	Here the pronoun they refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun them refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
390	2:45	n9hi			πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
391	2:46	in43			καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
392	2:46	a427		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
393	2:46	q1ge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 2:42. There were two possible meanings there, but here breaking bread seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
394	2:46	i2yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
395	2:46	a195		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words exultation and sincerity, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
396	2:47	z6ig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν	1	Luke says the whole people as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
397	2:47	kc42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοὺς σῳζομένους	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
398	2:47	a196			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
399	3:intro	hpd9				0	Acts 3 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The covenant God made with Abraham This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “Servant” Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead. “You killed” (3:15) For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
400	3:1	b5rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
401	3:1	br7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
402	3:1	a198			τὴν ἐνάτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
403	3:1	a199		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
404	3:2	f227		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form was being carried. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
405	3:2	u6nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καί τις ἀνὴρ	1	In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
406	3:2	j68t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is figuratively describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the womb of his mother when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
407	3:2	a200		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν λεγομένην	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
408	3:2	a201		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ὡραίαν	1	Beautiful is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
409	3:2	a202		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
410	3:3	a203		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν	1	The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him alms (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
411	3:4	xq4u			ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
412	3:4	e3c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of us in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
413	3:6	x6bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον	1	Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that silver and gold were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
414	3:6	zi9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι	1	What happens next in the story shows that by what I have, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
415	3:6	t2vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
416	3:6	a204		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
417	3:6	a205		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	περιπάτει	1	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
418	3:7	ec6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	In this verse, the pronoun he refers to Peter, while the pronouns him and his refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
419	3:7	a206		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
420	3:8	a207		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
421	3:8	abc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun he refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun them refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
422	3:8	q13i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	Luke is using the word began to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
423	3:8	zp7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
424	3:9	a208		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
425	3:10	zy7h			ἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος	1	Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
426	3:10	p2zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ	1	This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
427	3:10	a209		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
428	3:10	j6zf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	The words wonder and amazement mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
429	3:10	a210		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
430	3:10	a211		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wonder and amazement, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
431	3:11	a212		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
432	3:11	rk1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος	1	This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
433	3:11	rj43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ καλουμένῃ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
434	3:12	ndi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
435	3:12	uyg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ	1	Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
436	3:12	j6ld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?	1	Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
437	3:12	g4y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ	1	By us and our own, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of us and our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
438	3:12	mwd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ	1	Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with or. The term godliness describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the power that he and John have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
439	3:13	q8q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ	1	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
440	3:13	a213		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
441	3:13	kmqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	The term fathers could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could say “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
442	3:13	a214			τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν	1	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
443	3:13	a215			παρεδώκατε	1	Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
444	3:13	cp1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου	1	Here the phrase before the face of means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
445	3:13	a216		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πειλάτου	1	Pilate is the name of a man. His full name was Pontius Pilate. He was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
446	3:13	yy96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds one to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
447	3:14	a217		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
448	3:14	a218		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	Peter is using both the adjective Holy and the adjective Righteous to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds One to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
449	3:14	a219		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	The terms Holy and Righteous mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
450	3:14	a220		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
451	3:14	s6qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
452	3:15	a221		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκτείνατε	1	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
453	3:15	ljn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	Peter is using the expression the Originator of Life as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
454	3:15	a222		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
455	3:15	jwb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
456	3:15	a223		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡμεῖς	1	If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun we here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
457	3:16	abc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
458	3:16	qt8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun his refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
459	3:16	a224		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is using the name of Jesus figuratively to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
460	3:16	abc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	The first instance of the pronoun him refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
461	3:16	a225		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην	1	Peter is speaking of faith figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given complete health to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
462	3:17	v45t			καὶ νῦν	1	Peter uses the expression And now to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
463	3:17	a226		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Peter addresses the people figuratively as his brothers because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
464	3:17	a227		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
465	3:17	x62k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε	1	Peter likely means that the people acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
466	3:17	a228		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
467	3:18	gcc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως	1	Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God fulfilled prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
468	3:18	ms6d			διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, the prophets, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of mouth. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
469	3:18	z3l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
470	3:18	a229		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Peter is using the word all as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
471	3:19	cw18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψατε	1	Peter is speaking of his listeners figuratively as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
472	3:19	zm6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
473	3:19	a230		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically wiped away when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
474	3:20	a231		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Peter is speaking of these times figuratively as if they could actively come to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
475	3:20	x3ca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word refreshment, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
476	3:20	f2wm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Peter is using the term face figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
477	3:20	h3nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποστείλῃ	1	Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
478	3:20	yzr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
479	3:21	vgn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι	1	Peter is speaking figuratively of heaven as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
480	3:21	x2f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word restoration, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
481	3:21	a2m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπ’ αἰῶνος	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
482	3:21	a12i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
483	3:22	a232		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
484	3:22	a233		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
485	3:22	a249		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
486	3:22	a250		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
487	3:22	v5nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει	1	Here the expression raise up does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in 2:24 and 2:32. In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
488	3:22	t8di		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	Moses is using the term brothers to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
489	3:22	a234		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
490	3:22	a235		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
491	3:23	a236		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
492	3:23	t8a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
493	3:23	a237		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
494	3:23	a238		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις	1	Moses is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
495	3:23	a239		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου	1	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
496	3:24	u6x3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες & οἱ προφῆται	1	Here the phrase all the prophets is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in 3:18. It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets announced these days. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you can translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
497	3:24	xp9h			ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς	1	Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
498	3:24	a240		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαμουὴλ	1	Samuel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
499	3:24	m9pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	Peter is using the word days idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
500	3:24	a241		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
501	3:25	rh2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Peter is using the word sons figuratively in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
502	3:25	a242		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ υἱοὶ	1	Although the term sons is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
503	3:25	a243		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	The figurative sense of sons as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
504	3:25	a244		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
505	3:25	a245		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
506	3:25	wid4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
507	3:25	mad5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	The term seed figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
508	3:25	a246		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	As the apostle Paul notes in Galatians 3:16, God used the singular form of the word seed when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
509	3:25	a247		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
510	3:25	g31m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Here, families refers figuratively to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
511	3:26	b7tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν	1	The expression raised up has the same meaning here as in 3:22. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
512	3:26	z5q6			τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in 3:13. Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
513	3:26	x8ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	Here, turning someone from something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:19. Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
514	3:26	a248		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wickedness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
515	4:intro	pv3a				0	Acts 4 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26. Special concepts in this chapter Unity The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help. “Signs and wonders” This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true. Important figures of speech in this chapter The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11) The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “no other name” (4:12) “There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
516	4:1	abc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λαλούντων & αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
517	4:1	ew3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
518	4:1	a253		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	Sadducees is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
519	4:1	m74s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
520	4:1	d3tv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
521	4:2	abc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
522	4:2	mg5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows the resurrection to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
523	4:2	np5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
524	4:3	a254		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
525	4:3	a255		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The pronoun they refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun them refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
526	4:3	zla7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
527	4:3	a256		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word custody, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
528	4:3	h5f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη	1	The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in 4:5–6, would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
529	4:4	a257		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
530	4:4	a258		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
531	4:4	bm1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν	1	Luke is not using the word men in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate men as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
532	4:4	qd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	The word translated became could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
533	4:5	lw2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
534	4:5	cdj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in 4:15. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
535	4:5	j6p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
536	4:5	i9tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συναχθῆναι	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
537	4:6	a259		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας	1	Luke describes Annas as the high priest, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
538	4:6	l44n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἅννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος	1	These are the names of four men. The John mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
539	4:6	a260			ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
540	4:7	abc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο	1	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns their and they refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
541	4:7	t1eq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?	1	The words power and name (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
542	4:7	jc21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι	1	Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
543	4:7	a261		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς	1	Since the council members are speaking to two men, you would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as them in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
544	4:8	su5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
545	4:8	a262		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
546	4:8	a263		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι	1	Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the elders, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to Exodus 24:1, that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
547	4:8	a264		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	Here, the people means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
548	4:9	pq85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, a good deed to a sick man. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
549	4:9	je6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
550	4:9	b92n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος σέσωσται	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
551	4:10	q9ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
552	4:10	snd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective known expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
553	4:10	j3px		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πᾶσιν ὑμῖν	1	The pronoun you refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
554	4:10	khn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι	1	Here, name refers figuratively to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
555	4:10	a265		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	See how you translated this in 2:22 and 3:6. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
556	4:10	a266		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε	1	It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
557	4:10	jyj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
558	4:10	a267		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
559	4:11	nwg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1	The pronoun He refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
560	4:11	w195		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	Peter is quoting from Psalm 118:22, and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is figuratively describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
561	4:11	c1bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
562	4:11	f1nx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
563	4:12	a268		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
564	4:12	tq3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
565	4:12	l66w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
566	4:12	iz7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
567	4:12	jm25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 2:5. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
568	4:12	a269		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
569	4:12	gg8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
570	4:12	tdw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Peter is using the word we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
571	4:13	r6d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	θεωροῦντες	1	Luke is using the word seeing idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
572	4:13	t6kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου	1	Here the abstract noun boldness refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
573	4:13	qaa5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταλαβόμενοι	1	The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
574	4:13	xn39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν	1	Here the pronoun they refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun them. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
575	4:13	erv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται	1	The words uneducated and ordinary mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
576	4:14	h3cy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
577	4:14	a270		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον	1	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
578	4:14	fq4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν	1	The implication is that anything the council members said in opposition would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
579	4:15	ql31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	The pronoun them refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
580	4:15	a271		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
581	4:15	a272		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
582	4:16	p4g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?	1	This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As 4:21 indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
583	4:16	jn12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
584	4:16	nh5s			γνωστὸν σημεῖον	1	Here the word sign has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
585	4:17	a273		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
586	4:17	f71l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	By it, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
587	4:17	a274			ἐπὶ πλεῖον	1	Alternate translation: “any further”
588	4:17	w52j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
589	4:17	a275		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
590	4:17	a276		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, men has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
591	4:18	a277		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
592	4:18	a278		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν	1	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
593	4:18	a279		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν	1	The words speak and teach mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
594	4:18	a280		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
595	4:19	a281		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
596	4:19	a282		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in 4:19–20. (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in 4:8–12. Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
597	4:19	jf1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
598	4:19	a283		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
599	4:20	a284		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Peter and John are using the word For to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
600	4:20	hf3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν	1	Peter and John are using the word we to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
601	4:20	a285		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν	1	You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
602	4:21	y5y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
603	4:21	z2bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τὸν λαόν	1	The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
604	4:21	jbl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here, all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
605	4:22	gy8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
606	4:22	a286		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
607	4:22	ju4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the healing had happened on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
608	4:22	a287		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	Luke is using the possessive form to describe a sign that consisted of a healing. The word sign has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
609	4:23	a288		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπολυθέντες	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
610	4:23	a289		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
611	4:23	j2cx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους	1	The phrase their own people refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
612	4:23	a290		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	As Peter does in 4:8, here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
613	4:24	j3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν	1	The phrase having heard refers to the other believers, but the pronoun they seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus (4:29). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
614	4:24	a291			ἦραν φωνὴν	1	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
615	4:24	zu28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦραν φωνὴν	1	The expression they raised their voice is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
616	4:24	a292			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
617	4:24	a293		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	σὺ	1	The word you is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in 4:25–30. You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
618	4:24	a160		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
619	4:24	a294			τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	The believers are using the word translated heaven in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
620	4:25	ka83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών	1	The word mouth refers figuratively to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
621	4:25	vc5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, Psalm 2:1–2. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
622	4:25	a295		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The believers are using the word our to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
623	4:25	kat6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς	1	Here, father figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
624	4:25	a296			παιδός	1	The believers are using the word servant here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in 3:13 and 3:26.
625	4:25	a297		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
626	4:25	a298		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
627	4:25	f1x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
628	4:25	h6rc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἔθνη	1	The term nations refers to people groups that are not Jewish. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
629	4:25	w622		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κενά	1	The phrase useless things implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
630	4:26	fb5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in 4:25. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
631	4:26	w2by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
632	4:26	w64b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
633	4:26	a299		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
634	4:26	a300			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
635	4:26	yv19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word Lord refers to God and the word Christ refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
636	4:27	a301		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἡρῴδης	1	Herod is the name of a man. He was the official whom the Romans appointed to rule Galilee during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
637	4:27	a302		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος	1	This is the full name of the man who was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. See how you translated the name Pilate in 3:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
638	4:27	b1g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθησαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
639	4:27	nuc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	The phrase this city refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
640	4:27	ca33			παῖδά	1	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13 and 3:26. Alternate translation: “Messiah”
641	4:27	a303		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃν ἔχρισας	1	In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking figuratively of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
642	4:28	yz7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	Here, hand figuratively means God’s power and counsel figuratively means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
643	4:28	a304		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	The words hand and counsel, joined by and, are expressing a single idea. The word hand, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his counsel, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
644	4:28	a305		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	The believers are speaking figuratively of God’s hand and his counsel (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had predetermined what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
645	4:29	b38z			καὶ τὰ νῦν	1	The believers use the expression And now to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
646	4:29	t5qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν	1	The phrase look upon is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
647	4:29	a306		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τοῖς δούλοις σου	1	The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
648	4:29	zh7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον σου	1	The believers are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
649	4:29	a307		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
650	4:30	x9r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι	1	Here the hand figuratively represents God’s power. To stretch out the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
651	4:30	a308		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
652	4:30	t5uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
653	4:30	txb5			τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13, 3:26, and 4:27. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
654	4:31	a309		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
655	4:31	a310		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
656	4:31	x9b3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσαλεύθη	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
657	4:31	ps3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
658	4:31	a311		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
659	4:31	a312		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
660	4:31	a313		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
661	4:32	a314		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information in 4:32–37 that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word Now with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
662	4:32	xu3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	Here the word heart seems to represent the emotions and the word soul seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
663	4:32	a315		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	The terms heart and soul mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
664	4:32	a316			τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
665	4:32	zyp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά	1	The word everything may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:44. Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
666	4:33	a317		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
667	4:33	a318		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in 4:32. It does not refer just to the apostles, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
668	4:33	d8dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word grace, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
669	4:34	a331		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of For. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
670	4:34	a319		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Luke uses the word For in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
671	4:34	a320		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	Luke uses the word for in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
672	4:34	gw3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον	1	The phrase as many as is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
673	4:34	l938		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
674	4:35	a321		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	The expression laying it at the feet indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
675	4:35	vv4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
676	4:35	a322		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεδίδετο	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
677	4:35	ps4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word need, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
678	4:36	uc2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἰωσὴφ δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
679	4:36	a323		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς	1	Joseph and Barnabas are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
680	4:36	a324		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
681	4:36	a325		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form being translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
682	4:36	a326		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when translated from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
683	4:36	nr4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	The expression Son of figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
684	4:36	a327		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word Encouragement, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
685	4:36	a328		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λευείτης	1	The name Levite describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
686	4:36	a329		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κύπριος	1	Cyprus is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
687	4:37	a330			ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:32. Alternate translation: “that he owned”
688	4:37	gtv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
689	5:intro	k2uh				0	Acts 5 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3) No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Long sentences Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
690	5:1	v27a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
691	5:1	ysl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
692	5:1	a332		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
693	5:1	a333		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαπφείρῃ	1	Sapphira is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
694	5:2	a334		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, and you could say why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
695	5:2	xm1t			συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν	1	It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
696	5:2	dy8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν	1	This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in 4:37. Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
697	5:3	grr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?	1	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
698	5:3	pqd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	Peter is speaking figuratively of the heart of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had filled. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
699	5:3	a335		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
700	5:3	a426		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου	1	Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
701	5:3	zz5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
702	5:3	a336		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
703	5:4	vu7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν?	1	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
704	5:4	vi8w			ἔμενεν	1	Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
705	5:4	k7nc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πραθὲν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
706	5:4	a337		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	The pronoun it refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
707	5:4	a338		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
708	5:4	i5dw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
709	5:4	a339		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
710	5:4	a340		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	Peter speaks figuratively of this thing, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had placed it in his heart, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
711	5:4	a341		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Ananaias actually has lied to men, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
712	5:4	a342		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
713	5:5	a343		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
714	5:5	cc5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	The word translated expired means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
715	5:5	a344		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
716	5:5	a345		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
717	5:6	a346		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	Here the expression rising up means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
718	5:6	a347		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ νεώτεροι	1	This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
719	5:6	a348		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
720	5:7	a349		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
721	5:7	ry54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun his refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
722	5:7	k3c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ γεγονὸς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
723	5:8	a350			ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν	1	The word translated said means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
724	5:8	a351		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ἀπέδοσθε	1	Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
725	5:8	bcf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου	1	This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
726	5:9	v7sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?	1	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
727	5:9	hc22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
728	5:9	w1lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμῖν & σου & σε	1	The word you in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word your and the word you in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
729	5:9	pg1e			πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Here the word test means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
730	5:9	a352		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in 5:3 and 5:4. Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
731	5:9	a353		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες	1	Peter says Behold to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
732	5:9	xj1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	Peter is referring figuratively to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their feet represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The door represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
733	5:9	a354		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
734	5:9	a355		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε	1	The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will carry her out to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
735	5:10	s7en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	The word translated expired means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
736	5:10	a356		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
737	5:10	nwb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
738	5:10	a357		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ νεανίσκοι	1	See how you translated this expression in 5:6. However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these young men were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
739	5:11	vym8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
740	5:11	a358		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα	1	Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:5. Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
741	5:12	c2e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce background information in 5:12–16 that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
742	5:12	sri8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	Luke is using the hands of the apostles figuratively to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
743	5:12	ux3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
744	5:12	aud2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν & πάντες	1	The pronoun they refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
745	5:12	a359			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
746	5:12	k99k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος	1	This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11, which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
747	5:13	a360		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς	1	The expression the others refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
748	5:13	a361		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers dared to join them. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus (4:18), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in 5:28, the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
749	5:14	a362		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke says the Lord figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
750	5:14	m9wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:41. Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
751	5:14	oxni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
752	5:15	a364		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Luke says so that to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in 5:12, that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of 5:12–15 could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in 5:12. However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in 5:12 about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
753	5:15	l9bs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκφέρειν	1	The pronoun they refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
754	5:15	a365		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
755	5:15	a366		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων	1	The words cots and mats mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
756	5:15	y2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
757	5:15	a367			ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
758	5:16	a368		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀσθενεῖς	1	See how you translated the expression the sick in 5:15. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
759	5:16	fu1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
760	5:16	lyc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
761	5:16	a369		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	It does not appear that all is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat all as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
762	5:17	x2ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
763	5:17	f9ye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	The high priest and these Sadducees were first filled with jealousy and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
764	5:17	pc45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form were filled. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
765	5:17	a370		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the expression rising up means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
766	5:17	a371		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων	1	The phrase all those with him means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the Sadducees. As a note to 4:1 explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
767	5:17	a372		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word jealousy, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
768	5:17	a373		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy filled. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
769	5:18	j58p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
770	5:18	a374		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
771	5:19	wd37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
772	5:20	qm16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
773	5:20	z1x3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	The angel is using the term words figuratively to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
774	5:20	a375			τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
775	5:21	a376		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀκούσαντες	1	Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
776	5:21	df1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
777	5:21	l7uf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον	1	The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
778	5:21	a377		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
779	5:21	a378		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραγενόμενος	1	This does not mean that the high priest and his allies arrived in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
780	5:21	a379		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	The phrase even all the elders of the sons of Israel clarifies the name Sanhedrin by describing it membership. Luke is using the word elders here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in 4:5. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
781	5:21	a380		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	Here, sons figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
782	5:21	li6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον	1	Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
783	5:23	a381		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form shut, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
784	5:23	a382		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word security, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
785	5:23	a383		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνοίξαντες	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of opened. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
786	5:23	ld7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν	1	By no one, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
787	5:24	k5g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
788	5:24	baw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	περὶ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them does not refer to the apostles but to the words that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
789	5:24	p78m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
790	5:25	a384		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	This person says Behold to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
791	5:25	a8dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἔθεσθε	1	Here the word you refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
792	5:25	c1am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
793	5:26	e24h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν	1	The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun them refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
794	5:27	iq7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
795	5:28	a385			παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν	1	For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
796	5:28	f7pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε	1	In this verse the words you and your refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
797	5:28	g2hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	The high priest is using the term name figuratively to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
798	5:28	a386		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε	1	The high priest says behold to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
799	5:28	j4kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν	1	The high priest is speaking figuratively of the city of Jerusalem as if it were a container that the apostles had filled with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
800	5:28	a387		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	The high priest is speaking figuratively as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
801	5:28	a388		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	By us, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
802	5:28	ym1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα	1	The high priest is using the term blood figuratively to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
803	5:28	a389		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1	The phrase this man refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
804	5:29	a390		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
805	5:29	di9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
806	5:29	a391		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
807	5:30	a392		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
808	5:30	kwsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
809	5:30	r7av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
810	5:30	a393		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	The word you is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
811	5:30	a394		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
812	5:30	pu5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	The word translated as tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
813	5:30	a395		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	In some languages the word hung would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
814	5:31	a396		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
815	5:31	a397		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
816	5:31	uh2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	God placing Jesus at his right side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
817	5:31	mr1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and forgiveness, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
818	5:31	q1il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
819	5:32	a398		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word we to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
820	5:32	a399		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
821	5:32	yml6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
822	5:33	abx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	The pronoun they refers to the council members and the pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
823	5:34	i2rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
824	5:34	a400		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φαρισαῖος	1	The name Pharisee describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
825	5:34	a401		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
826	5:34	a402		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
827	5:34	fpr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
828	5:34	a403		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
829	5:34	a404		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Here, rising up means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
830	5:34	xk6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of commanded. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
831	5:34	a405		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	βραχὺ	1	Luke is using the adjective little as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
832	5:35	a406		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	τε	1	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
833	5:35	a407		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
834	5:35	ae1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν	1	Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could say that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as 5:33 says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
835	5:36	a408		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
836	5:36	a409		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θευδᾶς	1	Theudas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
837	5:36	uaj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	In this context, rose up figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
838	5:36	b3nl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “saying that he was somebody important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
839	5:36	a410		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
840	5:36	ie3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνῃρέθη	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
841	5:36	juz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
842	5:36	a411		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διελύθησαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
843	5:36	rzg5			καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν	1	Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
844	5:37	f33y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	μετὰ τοῦτον	1	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
845	5:37	a412		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος	1	The word Judas is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in 1:13 and 1:16. (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) Galilean is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in 1:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
846	5:37	a413		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	As in 5:36, rose up here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
847	5:37	p56f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς	1	Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
848	5:37	kz4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	Here, drew away is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
849	5:37	a414		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	κἀκεῖνος	1	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
850	5:37	a415		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	If your language would not use the passive form were persuaded, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
851	5:37	a416		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεσκορπίσθησαν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
852	5:38	i4bw			καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
853	5:38	a417		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Gamaliel is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
854	5:38	wz89			ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς	1	When Gamaliel tells the council to keep away from these men, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as 5:33 says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
855	5:38	zh1d			ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο	1	Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
856	5:38	a418		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Gamaliel is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts from men here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
857	5:38	uql8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλυθήσεται	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
858	5:39	a419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were from God. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
859	5:39	j819		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	Here the pronoun it refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
860	5:39	a420		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μήποτε	1	It may be helpful to state the implications of the word lest explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
861	5:39	a421		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
862	5:39	a422		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῆτε	1	The expression be found is an idiom. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
863	5:39	cyp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
864	5:40	z31c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
865	5:40	p6lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν	1	The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
866	5:40	fca9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	The Sanhedrin members are using the term name figuratively to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
867	5:41	a423		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	Luke is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
868	5:41	cv8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηξιώθησαν	1	If your language would not use the passive form had been considered, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
869	5:41	lk82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	Here, the Name figuratively means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
870	5:42	jj94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	τε	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
871	5:42	kyp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
872	5:42	x424		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι	1	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
873	6:intro	z5r5				0	Acts 6 General Notes Structure and formatting Acts 6:7 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book. Special concepts in this chapter The distribution to the widows The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “His face was like the face of an angel” No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
874	6:1	f8br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
875	6:1	cg5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
876	6:1	e7vb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν	1	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
877	6:1	ftz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοὺς Ἑβραίους	1	In this context, Luke is using the name Hebrews to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
878	6:1	s4qy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
879	6:1	rde8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word service, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
880	6:2	kwvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word So to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
881	6:2	n5r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ δώδεκα	1	Luke is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
882	6:2	is74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	οἱ δώδεκα	1	Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
883	6:2	jm17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the word of God and leave it behind them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
884	6:2	w9re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
885	6:2	fwk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διακονεῖν τραπέζαις	1	To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
886	6:3	lcyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
887	6:3	p1yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους	1	The expression being attested is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
888	6:3	mgid		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
889	6:3	pxe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
890	6:3	i27a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης	1	When the apostles say that they will appoint these men over the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
891	6:4	b3bj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου	1	The apostles are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
892	6:5	wh9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους	1	Luke is using the word before to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
893	6:5	jayc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
894	6:5	ajq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον	1	These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
895	6:5	vsyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
896	6:5	yqsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
897	6:5	cg5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀντιοχέα	1	The name Antiochian describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
898	6:6	lvaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
899	6:6	wu1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The apostles placed their hands on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
900	6:7	x48w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
901	6:7	wu4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were growing. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
902	6:7	ueie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
903	6:7	jg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	Luke speaks generally of the faith (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests became obedient to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
904	6:7	qq3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
905	6:8	et2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Στέφανος δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
906	6:8	pzr0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that grace and power were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
907	6:8	h8sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Luke may be using the two words grace and power together to express a single idea. The word grace would describe the character of the power that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
908	6:8	xscq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words grace and power, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
909	6:8	m0zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα	1	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
910	6:9	d74m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησαν	1	Here the expression rose up means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
911	6:9	nei0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
912	6:9	k88n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	The word Freedmen probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
913	6:9	e7b0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας	1	The word Cyrenians is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word Alexandrians is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words Cilicia and Asia are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
914	6:10	v5ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι	1	The expression stand against is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
915	6:10	fnb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	Luke may be using the two words wisdom and Spirit together to express a single idea. The word Spirit would describe the source and character of the wisdom that Stephen was displaying. The word Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
916	6:10	psha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
917	6:11	ren5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας	1	The word instigated means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
918	6:11	s2cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀκηκόαμεν	1	The men are using the word We to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
919	6:11	x747		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα	1	The men are using the term words figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
920	6:11	dgxi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μωϋσῆν	1	Moses is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
921	6:12	tqk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνεκίνησάν	1	In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in 6:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
922	6:12	l251		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents stirred up these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
923	6:12	dkbj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συνέδριον	1	Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in 4:14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
924	6:13	zv6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παύεται λαλῶν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb stop. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
925	6:13	ju6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλῶν ῥήματα	1	The men are using the term words figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
926	6:13	o3j2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου	1	The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a holy place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
927	6:14	c5l9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὁ Ναζωραῖος	1	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
928	6:14	uok4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν τόπον τοῦτον	1	By this place, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
929	6:14	vak4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς	1	The phrase handed down is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
930	6:15	k8rw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου	1	Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like the face of an angel. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
931	7:intro	p9h4				0	Acts 7 General Notes Structure and formatting This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in 6:13–14. Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin. (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50. A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses. It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter. Special concepts in this chapter “Stephen said” Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them. “Full of the Holy Spirit” The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say. Foreshadowing When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in 7:58, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts. Important figures of speech in this chapter Implied information Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Metonymy Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Important textual issues in this chapter “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46) In 7:46, some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Background knowledge The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes. Reference of “our” and “you” Throughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
932	7:1	hy9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἀρχιερεύς	1	Connecting Statement: Luke assumes that his readers will know that the high priest was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
933	7:2	abc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ ἔφη	1	The pronoun he refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
934	7:2	zbq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	The phrase Men, brothers and fathers is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
935	7:2	v5si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word fathers figuratively to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
936	7:2	kfep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun glory with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
937	7:2	n09p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης	1	Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in 6:11 that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the God of glory acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
938	7:2	pt4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word our to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
939	7:2	w1ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ	1	Stephen is using the term father figuratively to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
940	7:2	ust7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μεσοποταμίᾳ & Χαρράν	1	The word Mesopotamia is the name of a region, and the word Harran is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
941	7:3	uksj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
942	7:3	kgef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, while the pronoun him refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
943	7:4	pfg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν	1	The pronouns his and him and the first instance of the word he refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word he refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
944	7:4	mv26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	γῆς Χαλδαίων	1	Chaldeans is the name of a people group. This group lived in Mesopotamia, so as 7:2 indicates, Abraham had been living among these people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
945	7:4	pfg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	The word you is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
946	7:5	tnsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ	1	The pronouns him and his and the third instance of he refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of he refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
947	7:5	ax1j			οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
948	7:5	qff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός	1	This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
949	7:5	u6iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	The term seed figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
950	7:5	j09v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun possession with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
951	7:6	orw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
952	7:6	tn6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
953	7:6	jymv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν	1	Stephen is using the singular word seed figuratively to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun stranger and the singular pronoun him. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could say “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun them. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
954	7:7	k8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
955	7:7	f7fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος	1	Here, nation refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
956	7:7	q7y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν	1	As in 7:6, Stephen is using the singular pronoun him because he is using the singular word seed figuratively to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
957	7:8	iwfx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν	1	The first instance of the pronoun he refers to God, while the word him and the second instance of the pronoun he refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
958	7:8	mwc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς	1	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
959	7:8	oel3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ	1	Isaac and Jacob are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
960	7:8	g67f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ	1	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
961	7:8	ams1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
962	7:8	gaww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word patriarchs to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
963	7:9	n981		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	οἱ πατριάρχαι	1	Here the word patriarchs refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
964	7:9	fq7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὸν Ἰωσὴφ	1	Joseph is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
965	7:9	tik7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
966	7:9	u3dp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Αἴγυπτον	1	Egypt is the name of a place. See how you translated it in 2:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
967	7:9	w1is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	When Stephen says that God was with Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
968	7:10	kxgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	In these phrases the word he refers to God and the words him and his refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
969	7:10	bfoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns favor and wisdom with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
970	7:10	vpir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1	Here the phrase before Pharaoh may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
971	7:10	s5vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1	The phrase before Pharaoh could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
972	7:10	nycs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	In these phrases the words he and his refer to Pharaoh and the word him refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
973	7:10	yr7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
974	7:10	pb4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	The word household refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
975	7:11	p42j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	Here, Stephen speaks figuratively of famine and tribulation as if they came to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
976	7:11	ncnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Χανάαν	1	Canaan is the name of a place, the land where the Israelites eventually settled. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
977	7:11	frd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
978	7:11	p37v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
979	7:12	pia8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
980	7:12	cvhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον	1	By first, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
981	7:12	mbg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
982	7:13	a5f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	Stephen is using the adjective second as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds time to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
983	7:13	ce2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
984	7:13	m37e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
985	7:13	jxk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ	1	The phrase became known is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
986	7:14	aam5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ	1	Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
987	7:14	wl32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε	1	Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
988	7:15	zasp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Stephen says that Jacob went down because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
989	7:15	w2sm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they died as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
990	7:15	fe56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
991	7:16	slg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
992	7:16	pnur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συχὲμ	1	Shechem is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
993	7:16	la8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	In biblical times, people used silver as money. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
994	7:16	pk1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν υἱῶν Ἑμμὼρ	1	Hamor is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
995	7:17	tuq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	In your language it may be helpful to say that the people increased and multiplied before saying that the time of the promise approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
996	7:17	kh8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	Stephen is speaking figuratively of this time as if it were a person and could have approached on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
997	7:17	tlh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	Stephen is referring to the promise that he described in 7:7. God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
998	7:17	s2oe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	Stephen is using the two words increased and multiplied together to express a single idea. The word multiplied tells in what way the people increased. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
999	7:18	whe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	When Stephen says that this next king arose, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1000	7:18	g2wq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1001	7:18	e2y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ	1	Stephen is not saying that this king did not know Joseph personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, Joseph refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1002	7:19	qwbi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	He refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1003	7:19	z312		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1004	7:19	ug6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Although the term fathers is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1005	7:19	rh3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by exposed he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1006	7:19	n2vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι	1	Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the verb keep alive, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If your readers might misunderstand this double negative, , you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1007	7:20	nib6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ	1	Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
1008	7:20	q66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	Here Stephen introduces Moses into his story. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1009	7:20	cz9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1010	7:20	cd5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ	1	This could mean: (1) that Moses was beautiful in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very beautiful. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1011	7:20	pnb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you can make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1012	7:21	w3iu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	Moses was exposed because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1013	7:21	el3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν	1	This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus 2:1-10.) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1014	7:22	c9nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1015	7:22	att9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	Stephen says all as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1016	7:22	m3dm			δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
1017	7:23	o4cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1018	7:23	b9gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1019	7:23	ckxj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase it came up on his heart is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1020	7:23	fj9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, heart is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1021	7:23	x493		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1022	7:23	i4ko		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	Although the terms brothers and sons are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1023	7:24	l4zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Egyptian who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1024	7:24	y3yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1025	7:24	r2e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1026	7:25	hrsh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1027	7:25	mug9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Stephen is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1028	7:25	f6sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1029	7:25	nhb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Here, hand refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1030	7:26	t2vc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτοῖς	1	It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1031	7:26	qyc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε	1	Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of them and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1032	7:26	mpc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1033	7:26	kyde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1034	7:26	zzt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1035	7:26	z5g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Moses is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1036	7:26	k1ku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1	Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1037	7:27	xef7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The word him refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1038	7:27	iq30		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1039	7:27	q2r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1040	7:27	wtq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν	1	In this context, the words ruler and judge mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1041	7:27	t1hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The man is using the word our to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1042	7:28	vow8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding do you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1043	7:28	hk1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1044	7:28	qfxh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1045	7:28	jxka			ὃν τρόπον	1	Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
1046	7:29	l149		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	General Information: The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1047	7:29	rbhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	Stephen is using the term word figuratively to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1048	7:29	pit4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαδιάμ	1	Midian is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1049	7:29	q8qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1050	7:30	zx1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1051	7:30	qci0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1052	7:30	veft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος	1	The word appeared does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1053	7:30	f7yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1054	7:31	q6w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses admired the sight because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1055	7:31	uk7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου	1	Stephen is speaking figuratively of the voice of the Lord as if it were a person and that it came on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1056	7:32	b26o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1057	7:33	bpml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1058	7:33	x7cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1059	7:33	rxnj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1060	7:33	xl9p			τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of sandals. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
1061	7:33	clk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1062	7:34	l0au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον.	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1063	7:34	yz7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδὼν, εἶδον	1	Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb seen is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1064	7:34	x5bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ λαοῦ μου	1	God uses the possessive word my to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1065	7:34	j32c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς	1	God describes himself as having come down from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means figuratively that he is taking action to rescue them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1066	7:34	atdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	3	God is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1067	7:34	sq8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	νῦν δεῦρο	1	God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1068	7:34	x34c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says let me send you to Egypt. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1069	7:35	x4p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν	1	General Information: Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says This Moses, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
1070	7:35	nv5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in 7:27. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1071	7:35	vuqy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?	1	See how you translated this rhetorical question in 7:27. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1072	7:35	oic6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν	1	See how you translated the combination of ruler and judge in 7:27. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1073	7:35	vp7e			λυτρωτὴν	1	In this context, the word translated redeemer refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
1074	7:35	yjz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου	1	Here, hand is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1075	7:35	abc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ	1	See how you translated the word appeared in 7:30. Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1076	7:36	gz9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1077	7:36	n75x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ	1	Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, the Red Sea, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1078	7:37	k710		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1079	7:37	vykp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ	1	Stephen is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1080	7:37	b4sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ	1	Here, the expression raise up describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1081	7:37	j2rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1082	7:38	fd25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος	1	This is the one refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1083	7:38	z1z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1	It might be more natural to put the information about Mount Sinai next to the information about Moses receiving living words. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1084	7:38	vdnz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο	1	This second instance of who in the verse refers to Moses, not to the fathers. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1085	7:38	y2zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1	It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the words that he received. Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1086	7:38	p3xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγια ζῶντα	1	Stephen is using the term words to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1087	7:38	w2gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λόγια ζῶντα	1	Stephen is using the term living figuratively to describe God’s words as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1088	7:39	ab0s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	The word whom refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1089	7:39	mvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπώσαντο	1	Stephen is speaking figuratively to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1090	7:39	z3ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Here, hearts is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1091	7:40	l8u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ.	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1092	7:40	kb3o			εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
1093	7:40	fzsq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῷ Ἀαρών	1	Aaron is the name of a man, the older brother of Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1094	7:40	a68q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ	1	It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1095	7:41	ux1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this image of a calf was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as the idol later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1096	7:41	v6tx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	Stephen is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1097	7:41	hjp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	The pronoun they refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1098	7:41	hh77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	Stephen describes what he also calls the calf and the idol as the works of their hands by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1099	7:42	d3dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς	1	Stephen is speaking figuratively as if God had physically turned away. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1100	7:42	u7lx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, the word host means “army,” and the word heaven means “sky.” Stephen is speaking figuratively of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1101	7:42	ya6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1102	7:42	f314		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1103	7:42	w38i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1104	7:42	o5ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding did you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1105	7:42	gd1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of Israel that they did not really worship Him in the wilderness with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1106	7:43	zek5			καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος.	1	The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
1107	7:42	q9rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μὴ & προσηνέγκατέ	1	You is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (house) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you can use singular you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1108	7:42	tck0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	σφάγια καὶ θυσίας	1	In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (slain beasts) and those that are bloodless (offerings), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1109	7:42	j4q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1110	7:43	h20h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, 7:42: “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me … , did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1111	7:43	q85n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	The term took up indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term remove in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1112	7:43	gxh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς	1	As in 7:42, you is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse your is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you can use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1113	7:43	im7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ	1	The tabernacle of Molech was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1114	7:43	cq47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν	1	The Israelites were not carrying around an actual star, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1115	7:43	gm4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε	1	The word images refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1116	7:43	zgq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	3	Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated and to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1117	7:44	fs4q			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
1118	7:43	rrn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος	1	This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1119	7:44	hfmx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ	1	Stephen is not saying that the tabernacle was with the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built according to the pattern that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1120	7:44	m9gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου	1	Stephen calls this tent the tabernacle of the testimony by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1121	7:44	fk06		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1	It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1122	7:44	masq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1123	7:44	avqh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the pattern for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1124	7:45	uqca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	The pronoun which refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in”
1125	7:45	qjov			διαδεξάμενοι	1	The phrase having received … in turn translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
1126	7:45	n2sc			εἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle with Joshua, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
1127	7:45	e3gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσήγαγον	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1128	7:45	znov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰησοῦ	1	Joshua is the name of a man, the successor of Moses as leader of the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1129	7:45	eww5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Stephen is using the term nations to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1130	7:45	spm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1131	7:45	zjlj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ	1	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1132	7:45	wot8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ	1	Stephen is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1133	7:46	k9vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὑρεῖν	1	Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1134	7:45	bux7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δαυείδ	1	David is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 1:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1135	7:46	x4kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The pronoun who refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God”
1136	7:46	ykio		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1137	7:46	yl80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὑρεῖν	1	Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1138	7:46	w3cu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκήνωμα	1	The word dwelling refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word figuratively to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1139	7:46	in7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1	Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1140	7:46	fsmp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Jacob figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1141	7:47	bo1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σολομῶν	1	Solomon is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 3:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1142	7:47	k54c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ οἶκον	1	Stephen is using the word house figuratively to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1143	7:47	dlk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ οἶκον	1	The pronoun him refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1144	7:48	wuce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὁ Ὕψιστος	1	This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1145	7:48	fwvu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	χειροποιήτοις	1	Stephen is using the adjective made with hands (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds houses to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1146	7:48	c822		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	Stephen is using the word hand, one part of a person, figuratively to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1147	7:48	ota0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χειροποιήτοις	1	The word houses figuratively means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1148	7:48	d4fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by the prophet, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1149	7:49	oyax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1150	7:49	k2vn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	Speaking through Isaiah, God figuratively describes Heaven as his throne and the earth as his footstool. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1151	7:49	i4u3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	God is using the two parts of creation, Heaven and earth, to mean all of creation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1152	7:49	wc9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1	God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1153	7:49	rqr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1154	7:49	mshp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποῖον οἶκον	1	The word house figuratively means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1155	7:49	vjaq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1156	7:50	hqjr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1157	7:50	rfk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1158	7:50	jlg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	God is using one part of himself, his hand, to represent all of himself figuratively in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1159	7:50	gzw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα πάντα	1	The phrase all these things refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation”
1160	7:51	umq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen is using the exclamatory word O to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative O. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1161	7:51	yxe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ	1	Stephen is using the adjective stiff-necked as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1162	7:51	vn7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκληροτράχηλοι	1	Stephen is speaking figuratively of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1163	7:51	zp55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen speaks figuratively of the Sanhedrin members’ heart and ears as uncircumcised by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1164	7:51	esfc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen is using one part of a person, the heart, figuratively meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1165	7:51	jslb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen is figuratively using one part of a person, the ears, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1166	7:51	zgon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε	1	The word always is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1167	7:51	w164		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς	1	The words you and your are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1168	7:51	d2v8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1169	7:52	x7kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1170	7:52	eiw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1171	7:52	q8wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ Δικαίου	1	Stephen is using the adjective Righteous as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds One to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1172	7:52	agd9			οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
1173	7:53	axhl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1	The pronoun who refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1174	7:53	t92q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1	The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive the law themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them figuratively to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1175	7:53	euw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in 7:38 that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1176	7:54	ef2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1177	7:54	u4l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here, the expression they were cut to their hearts is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1178	7:54	ae9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1179	7:55	dlux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1180	7:55	ntp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν	1	The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1181	7:55	bl2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1182	7:55	zpry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1183	7:55	vamz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1184	7:55	vyz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” at the right of God. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1185	7:56	gzvv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Stephen is using the term behold to focus his listener’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1186	7:56	p0jg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ	1	Stephen is speaking figuratively of the heavens being opened to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1187	7:56	aqp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	The title Son of Man is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1188	7:56	imoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the nominal adjective right in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1189	7:56	cr19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase at the right of God in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1190	7:56	rvwp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus standing in 7:55. Alternate translation: “, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1191	7:57	p4cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1192	7:57	wtwk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	This is an idiom that suggests figuratively that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1193	7:57	hm0q			κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
1194	7:57	t287			ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
1195	7:58	ks1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	Luke is likely speaking figuratively when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members throwing Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1196	7:58	teas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ μάρτυρες	1	These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in 6:13. According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1197	7:58	ryrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου	1	The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1198	7:58	wy7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	These outer garments were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1199	7:58	sx2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας	1	The expression at the feet is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1200	7:58	e2vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαύλου	1	Saul is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1201	7:59	fxhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase calling out tells how Stephen was saying what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1202	7:59	k2el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1203	7:60	u86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς & τὰ γόνατα	1	Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1204	7:60	hi24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1205	7:60	dfjs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1206	7:60	tvf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold … against. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1207	7:60	r9vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says he fell asleep. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1208	8:intro	q9d9				0	Acts 8 General Notes Structure and formatting The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33. The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.” Special concepts in this chapter Receiving the Holy Spirit In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15-19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers. Proclaimed This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
1209	8:1	ez88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in 8:3 and in chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
1210	8:1	i1tc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1211	8:1	vc8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here, day is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1212	8:1	xp25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1213	8:1	u5pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1	The word all is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1214	8:1	ok0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας	1	Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. See how you translated them in 1:8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1215	8:1	k5a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	The implication is that the apostles remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1216	8:2	tp9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	General Information: It may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1217	8:2	sjc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον	1	The word translated carried away means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1218	8:3	yd2i			κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους	1	Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
1219	8:3	w6vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	Luke may mean houses where Christians met, as described in 2:46, and he means men and women who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1220	8:4	n52l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & διασπαρέντες	1	Luke is using the participle having been scattered, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1221	8:4	ymy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & διασπαρέντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. See how you translated it in 8:1. Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1222	8:4	su6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in 4:4. Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated proclaiming here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1223	8:5	dh3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φίλιππος	1	Connecting Statement: Philip is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 1:13. Philip was one of the apostles. A man by that same name, possibly the same man, was chosen as one of the deacons in 6:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1224	8:5	gz5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	Luke speaks of Philip going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1225	8:5	f45b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1226	8:5	pk1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν Χριστόν	1	Luke is using the name Christ figuratively by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1227	8:6	cnt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ὄχλοι	1	Luke implicitly means the crowds in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1228	8:6	jyvw			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	Alternate translation: “all together”
1229	8:6	tt0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου	1	Luke is using the participle being spoken, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1230	8:6	g0ft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1231	8:6	wm83			τὰ σημεῖα	1	Here the word signs has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
1232	8:7	un6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο	1	As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had unclean spirits being the subject of the sentence to the unclean spirits themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people to such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1233	8:7	pehe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἐχόντων	1	Luke is using the participle having, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term those to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1234	8:7	xb2n			ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα	1	Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
1235	8:7	nz7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1236	8:7	v8uj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in 4:10. Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1237	8:7	imbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι	1	Luke is using the participle paralyzed as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1238	8:7	anq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1239	8:8	s8bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1240	8:8	z5z3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	The phrase that city refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1241	8:8	r0nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1242	8:9	jm7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων	1	Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1243	8:9	bed1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1244	8:9	cx7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμων	1	Simon is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in 1:13.
1245	8:10	mvcm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	The phrase to whom refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1246	8:10	evt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	Luke is using the word all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1247	8:10	h51l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	Luke is using the adjectives little and great as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1248	8:10	ibl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1249	8:10	h5ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1	The demonstrative pronoun This stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1250	8:10	j3d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1251	8:10	yw5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ καλουμένη	1	If your language does not use the passive form called, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1252	8:11	pxj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ	1	General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
1253	8:12	h1hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπίστευσαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1254	8:12	zwoj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1255	8:12	zjh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title Christ indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1256	8:12	jg1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Since Jesus inaugurated the kingdom of God when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1257	8:12	vsy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1258	8:13	k2th		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν	1	Luke uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1259	8:13	bayg			ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ	1	Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
1260	8:13	v91t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1261	8:13	rnr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας	1	The word that ULT translates as works here is the same word that it translates as “power” in 8:10. It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that works of power that are truly great are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1262	8:13	d4yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις	1	The terms signs and works mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1263	8:14	s7lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1264	8:14	lk9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1265	8:14	uwxo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1	If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1266	8:14	ju21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ Σαμάρεια	1	Luke is using the word Samaria figuratively by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1267	8:14	e682		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1268	8:14	td5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πέτρον καὶ Ἰωάννην	1	Peter and John are the names of two men. See how you translated them in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1269	8:15	af1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun who stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1270	8:15	hd1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	οἵτινες	1	Since the pronoun who stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1271	8:15	hk1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καταβάντες	1	Luke speaks of Philip having come down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1272	8:15	bun9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	καταβάντες	1	Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1273	8:16	d2z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1274	8:16	l4ez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1275	8:16	qmjp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1276	8:16	bpzz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός	1	The pronoun he stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1277	8:16	rn3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, the name of the Lord Jesus represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1278	8:16	m1nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1279	8:17	bsll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον	1	The first instance of the pronoun they stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them and the second instance of they stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1280	8:17	bldf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ἐπετίθεσαν	1	Since this instance of the pronoun they stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in 8:18 and “they” and “the ones” in 8:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1281	8:17	q7gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	Peter and John laying their hands on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])d John placed their hands on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1282	8:18	rh79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1283	8:19	fbw9			δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
1284	8:20	df1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1285	8:20	y4ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἀργύριόν	1	Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that silver was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1286	8:20	gh12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Peter is referring figuratively to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it the gift of God. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1287	8:21	p2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	The terms part and share mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1288	8:21	ufk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σοι	1	The phrase to you represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1289	8:21	xbh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1290	8:21	p9v4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) that Simon’s heart is not right in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1291	8:22	sa6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wickedness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1292	8:22	ppk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1293	8:22	pe2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Peter is using the conditional word if to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1294	8:22	lq4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1295	8:23	tf3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	The gall plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1296	8:23	kpu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	Peter is using the gall plant figuratively by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1297	8:23	d3v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	Peter is describing bitterness figuratively as if it were made of gall or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1298	8:23	j696		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας	1	Peter speaks figuratively of the bond of unrighteousness as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1299	8:24	n5cw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε	1	Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as 8:18 describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, You and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1300	8:24	v2wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1301	8:24	hwc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1	Simon is stating the pronoun You, which is already implied in the verb pray, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1302	8:24	u1a4			ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
1303	8:24	sk5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1304	8:25	nzvg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1	Luke is using the word translated Then to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1305	8:25	p3rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	The ones Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1306	8:25	uz15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες	1	Luke is using the participles having testified and having spoken, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1307	8:25	ww9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1308	8:25	eu66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	The term villages refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1309	8:26	mbj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1310	8:26	w1nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνάστηθι	1	Here the word arise means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1311	8:26	le2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν	1	The angel speaks of the road going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1312	8:26	a18y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος	1	This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1313	8:27	s0yn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη	1	As in the previous verse, the word arising means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1314	8:27	xy7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἰδοὺ	1	Luke is using the word behold to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1315	8:27	zkc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
1316	8:27	i5zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ	1	This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1317	8:27	s1uf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης	1	While the word eunuch describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1318	8:27	t5t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κανδάκης	1	Kandake was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1319	8:27	nm48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς	1	Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was over the treasure of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1320	8:27	v8q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1321	8:27	uk32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὃς ἐληλύθει	1	Your language may say “gone” rather than come in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1322	8:28	d3kv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῦ ἅρματος	1	Here and in 8:29 and 8:38, the term chariot probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1323	8:28	bx2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν	1	Luke is using the phrase the prophet Isaiah figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1324	8:28	n40c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεγίνωσκεν	1	Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as 8:30 explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1325	8:29	llh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ	1	The Spirit means figuratively that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1326	8:30	ffh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην	1	Luke is using the phrase Isaiah the prophet figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1327	8:30	x98i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις	1	The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1328	8:31	r5g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με?	1	The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1329	8:31	zx9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1330	8:32	nd93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1	This a quotation from Isaiah 53:7–8. It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1331	8:32	bgk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1332	8:32	kh97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤχθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1333	8:32	lu3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος	1	A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1334	8:32	k8sy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1	This means that the Messiah does not speak by association with the way a person would open his mouth in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1335	8:33	dwur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of humiliation and justice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1336	8:33	y2a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1337	8:33	k3uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1338	8:33	ec09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1339	8:33	yxxn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generation, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1340	8:33	idk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1341	8:34	agq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1342	8:34	htb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δέομαί σου	1	The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1343	8:34	pa3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἑτέρου τινός	1	In this context, the pronoun other means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1344	8:35	j7xw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνοίξας & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1	By association with the way a person would be opening his mouth in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1345	8:35	uw21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης	1	By this scripture, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1346	8:35	xg4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Luke is using the name Jesus figuratively by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1347	8:36	ip13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τι ὕδωρ & ὕδωρ	1	Luke and the official are using the word water figuratively to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1348	8:36	muz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι?	1	This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in 8:37 by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1349	8:36	wb9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	με βαπτισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1350	8:37	ov75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ	1	As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1351	8:37	qj5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1352	8:37	djq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1353	8:37	e3uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1354	8:38	l8wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα	1	Luke is using the term chariot figuratively by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1355	8:38	nn00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν	1	The pronoun he stands for Philip, and the pronoun him stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1356	8:39	xp52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	γὰρ	1	While the word translated for often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead went on his way. Rather, the word for seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1357	8:40	r1x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1358	8:40	bbws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1359	8:40	arh5			διερχόμενος	1	Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
1360	8:40	zfn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὰς πόλεις πάσας	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1361	8:40	yf7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἄζωτον & Καισάρειαν	1	Azotus and Caesarea are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1362	9:intro	jm6x				0	Acts 9 General Notes Structure and formatting In 9:1, the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation. In 9:32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter. Acts 9:31 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book. Special concepts in this chapter “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus” The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community. “the church” Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word church in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus. Important figures of speech in this chapter “the Lord” Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter What Saul saw when he met Jesus It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
1363	9:1	r4n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	General Information: Luke uses the word translated But to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1364	9:1	anb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς	1	Luke is using the two words threat and murder together to express a single idea. The word murder tells what kind of threat Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1365	9:1	lrre		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐμπνέων	1	Luke is using the term breathing figuratively by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1366	9:2	wyfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & εὕρῃ & ἀγάγῃ	1	The pronoun him refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun he refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1367	9:2	zu6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐπιστολὰς	1	See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these letters were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1368	9:2	v9lw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς	1	Luke is using the terms Damascus and synagogues figuratively by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1369	9:2	lvzt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δαμασκὸν	1	Damascus is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1370	9:2	thuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας	1	As the General Notes to this chapter explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1371	9:2	mma1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1372	9:2	grch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1373	9:2	a6z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1374	9:3	jf4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1375	9:3	by55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	Luke uses the phrase it happened that to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1376	9:3	dm6c			αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
1377	9:3	gua8			ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
1378	9:4	y4u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1379	9:4	c9l4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me.” or “stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1380	9:5	jaq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε?	1	Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is Lord. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1381	9:5	abc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & ὁ	1	The first instance of he stands for Saul, and the second instance of he stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1382	9:5	q8ge			εἶ & σὺ	1	Both occurrences of the word you here are singular.
1383	9:6	fbi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθήσεταί σοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1384	9:8	puw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1385	9:8	dgg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰσήγαγον	1	The pronoun they stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in 9:8. Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1386	9:9	fhn6			ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων	1	Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
1387	9:9	t8uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν	1	This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. 9:11 says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1388	9:10	j847		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας	1	Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1389	9:10	kgn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in 5:1 (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1390	9:10	vqh0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ὁ Κύριος	1	Here and throughout this chapter, the Lord is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1391	9:10	vl8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε	3	Behold, I is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1392	9:10	u3e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε	3	Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve the Lord. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1393	9:11	mn24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	Here, the word arising means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1394	9:11	kopv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form called, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1395	9:11	pyr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	Straight is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1396	9:11	ie1l			Ἰούδα	1	Judas it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in 1:13, 1:16, and 5:37 for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1397	9:11	u5j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα	1	Tarsus is the name of a city. Alternate translation: “a man named Saul from the city of Tarsus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1398	9:11	k3ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται	1	The Lord says behold to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1399	9:12	jk46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας	1	In this culture, laying hands on people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in 6:6 for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1400	9:13	quxn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ πολλῶν	1	Ananias is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1401	9:13	sh2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅσα κακὰ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evils, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1402	9:13	la9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Ananias is using the term saints figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1403	9:14	ptd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1404	9:14	gk5o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δῆσαι	1	Ananias is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1405	9:14	hi6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Ananias is using the participle calling, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1406	9:14	t3fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1407	9:14	ampz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Here, calling on is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1408	9:15	jmt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι	1	The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an instrument who is characterized by his choosing. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1409	9:15	gk29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1410	9:15	ndxu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι	1	The Lord describes Saul figuratively as an instrument or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1411	9:15	z5fj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	The Lord says figuratively that Saul will carry his name, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1412	9:15	h8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1413	9:15	wh8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν	1	The term nations refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in 4:25. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1414	9:15	bbfd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	βασιλέων	1	The Lord is using kings, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1415	9:15	uq9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱῶν & Ἰσραήλ	1	The Lord is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1416	9:16	kty3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	Here, name figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1417	9:17	s8ms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1418	9:17	my6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	When Ananias laid his hands on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at 9:2 and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1419	9:17	q61x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σοι & ἤρχου & ἀναβλέψῃς	1	All of the occurrences of the word you in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1420	9:17	cah9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Brother is a figurative title that Ananias is using for Saul. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in 1:15 and 6:3. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in 3:17 and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my kinsman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1421	9:17	cxu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ ὀφθείς σοι	1	Ananias is using the participle having appeared, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1422	9:17	ptg0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ᾗ ἤρχου	1	Your language may say “coming” rather than going in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1423	9:17	a89q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use the passive form filled, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1424	9:17	x4ey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Ananias is speaking figuratively as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1425	9:18	m1hx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	λεπίδες	1	It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the scales that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1426	9:18	efs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1427	9:19	rxfi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνισχύθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1428	9:20	rc49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The personal pronoun he refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
1429	9:20	w65r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1430	9:21	xid8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1431	9:21	a8j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἀκούοντες & ὁ πορθήσας & τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους	1	Luke is using the participles hearing, having destroyed, and calling on, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms ones and one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1432	9:21	f4fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς?	1	The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1433	9:21	ctg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	By this name the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1434	9:21	l82i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Here, the name of Jesus figuratively represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1435	9:21	zuoi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Here, calling on is an idiom. See how you translated it in 9:14. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1436	9:21	i512		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1437	9:21	pnrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1	Like Ananias in 9:14, the people here are figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1438	9:22	r1np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	Saul was not intentionally stirring up the Jews. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1439	9:23	cg9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1	As in 2:1 and 7:23, this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1440	9:23	nyh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1441	9:23	g74c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1442	9:23	g6gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1	The pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1443	9:24	gnm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of But in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1444	9:24	lv62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1445	9:24	cy9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρετηροῦντο & τὰς πύλας & ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν	1	The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1446	9:24	b0gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς πύλας	1	Luke is using the gates figuratively to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1447	9:24	aezc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς	1	Luke is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, day and night, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (1) Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1448	9:25	lc8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	These disciples were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1449	9:26	e38m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1450	9:27	abca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	Βαρναβᾶς & ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ & ἐπαρρησιάσατο	1	The pronoun him refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun he refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to the Lord in the second instance. The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1451	9:27	abcb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βαρναβᾶς	1	Barnabas is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 4:36. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1452	9:27	n9f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Saul had spoken boldly with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1453	9:28	cgb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1454	9:28	m5rs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun he refers to Saul. The pronoun them refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1455	9:28	r6ok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος	1	This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1456	9:28	fbb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 9:27. Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1457	9:29	d7lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἑλληνιστάς	1	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in 6:1. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
1458	9:29	lgqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν	1	The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1459	9:30	uz9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1460	9:30	j4mt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	Luke uses the phrase brought him down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1461	9:30	aqn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1462	9:31	fh2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶχεν εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1463	9:31	elq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could say “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1464	9:31	vx51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομουμένη	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1465	9:31	j8c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here, journeying figuratively means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1466	9:31	z59s			πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”
1467	9:31	hl24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Luke is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as the one who was giving the church encouragement. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1468	9:32	w68g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1469	9:32	m9sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	διὰ πάντων	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1470	9:32	ad7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθεῖν	1	Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1471	9:32	tckc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα	1	Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1472	9:32	g5c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λύδδα	1	Lydda is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1473	9:33	hzd7			εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	The word found does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
1474	9:33	jnc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν	1	Luke uses this sentence to introduce Aeneas as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1475	9:33	owf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Αἰνέαν	1	Aeneas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1476	9:33	uj5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1477	9:33	k7hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	The reason why Aeneas had been lying in a bed for eight years was that he was paralyzed. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1478	9:34	t13n			ἀνάστηθι	1	Arise in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
1479	9:34	ff2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	Peter says for yourself to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you can make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronoun]])
1480	9:34	khrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1481	9:35	wykn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	The pronoun him refers to Aeneas. The pronoun who refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1482	9:35	z3fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1483	9:35	qkv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	Sharon is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1484	9:35	pf23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1485	9:35	x9yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	Here, turned to the Lord figuratively means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1486	9:36	zgq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δέ	1	Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1487	9:36	gy8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰόππῃ	1	General Information: Joppa is the name of a city that was about 15 kilometers or about 10 miles from Lydda. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1488	9:36	gwr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς	1	Tabitha was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and Dorcas was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1489	9:36	z8la		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λέγεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1490	9:36	q2rn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν	1	Luke speaks figuratively of Dorcas as if she were a container that was full of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1491	9:37	mg72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	The phrase in those days refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1492	9:37	y8sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λούσαντες & αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν	1	This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1493	9:37	znj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ	1	This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1494	9:37	lbrl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑπερῴῳ	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large, sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1495	9:38	qlp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1496	9:38	pukn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	παρακαλοῦντες	1	Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, urging would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1497	9:39	k1se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς & Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here the word arising means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1498	9:39	tdrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς	1	This first instance of them in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of them would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1499	9:39	me79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1500	9:39	piu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς	1	It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these coats and garments to help these widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1501	9:39	y6q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα	1	This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1502	9:40	yp2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα	1	Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1503	9:40	wr7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1	This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah restores you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
1504	9:40	k28m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1	Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1505	9:41	r7n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	The implication is that Peter extended his hand to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1506	9:41	b73s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας	1	These saints and widows were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1507	9:41	ex8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἁγίους	1	Luke is using the term saints figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in 9:33. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1508	9:42	nda9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1509	9:43	k9ik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1510	9:43	qar2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βυρσεῖ	1	A tanner is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1511	10:intro	ym7z				0	Acts 10 General Notes Structure and formatting Verses 1-2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles. In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together. The long sentence in verses 36-38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST. Special concepts in this chapter Jews visiting with Gentiles The Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Baptism and the Holy Spirit Those who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
1512	10:1	wtb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1513	10:1	h6zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κορνήλιος	1	Cornelius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1514	10:1	x476		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἑκατοντάρχης	1	A centurion was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1515	10:1	abcd			Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1516	10:1	h2a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	Σπείρης	1	A regiment was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your language that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1517	10:1	e88y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰταλικῆς	1	Italian is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1518	10:2	s6rh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	The word devout and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1519	10:2	rz4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1520	10:2	abce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that the people refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1521	10:2	imrx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1	The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in 2:25. Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1522	10:2	w2kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός	1	The phrase through all, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1523	10:3	up3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1524	10:3	ttsl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1525	10:3	z5ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1526	10:4	abcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun he stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun him stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1527	10:4	bd2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τί ἐστιν, κύριε	1	Cornelius uses the respectful title lord because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in 9:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1528	10:4	abcg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun he stands for the angel, and the pronoun him stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1529	10:4	p5ml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	A memorial offering was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering figuratively to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1530	10:4	xpa1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, before means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1531	10:5	h33i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1532	10:6	hou9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ξενίζεται παρά	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1533	10:6	bw0q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βυρσεῖ	1	See how you translated the term tanner in 9:43.
1534	10:7	g6lq			ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
1535	10:7	yg7g			εὐσεβῆ	1	The adjective devout describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
1536	10:8	pcg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἅπαντα	1	By everything, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1537	10:9	ey9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων	1	The demonstrative pronoun those refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1538	10:9	tu7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1539	10:9	r6l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1540	10:10	im7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις	1	Luke speaks figuratively of this vision as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1541	10:11	n4hi			θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”
1542	10:11	u9u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form opened, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1543	10:11	jh1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθιέμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1544	10:12	fdt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντα τὰ	1	The word all is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1545	10:12	ua3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	From Peter’s response in 10:14, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1546	10:13	a2z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Luke speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1547	10:13	zmeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάς	1	Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1548	10:14	z7r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μηδαμῶς	1	Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1549	10:14	ewlu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word never and the negative terms common and unclean. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1550	10:14	p0bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1551	10:14	a2jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1552	10:15	as42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	φωνὴ πάλιν & πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The implied verb here is came, and so Luke is speaking once again of this voice figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1553	10:15	xs5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1554	10:15	st9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	The voice is adding the pronoun you for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1555	10:16	rlr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1556	10:16	ej9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1557	10:17	d4zi			ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν	1	Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
1558	10:17	n6da		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these men appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1559	10:17	cg9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1560	10:17	e62m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα	1	The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a gate in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1561	10:18	qe9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1562	10:18	r91o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ξενίζεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1563	10:19	iqx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς	1	The Spirit is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1564	10:19	va39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἄνδρες τρεῖς	1	Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1565	10:20	ndju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάς	1	Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1566	10:20	ym1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατάβηθι	1	The implication is that Peter is to go down from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1567	10:20	wx4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1568	10:20	j3iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν διακρινόμενος	1	This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1569	10:22	rva1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	οἱ & εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ.	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1570	10:22	i4zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1571	10:22	ue5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1572	10:22	wvl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	The word righteous and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1573	10:22	hrta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in 10:2. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1574	10:22	hihl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1575	10:22	gv91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Luke says whole as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1576	10:22	e15o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1	The messengers are using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1577	10:23	shs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν	1	The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1578	10:23	ycoi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the word arising means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1579	10:23	t7cz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1580	10:24	c3s6			τῇ & ἐπαύριον	1	The next day means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
1581	10:25	wxt8			ὡς & ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον	1	ὡς … ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον
1582	10:25	b4pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας	1	He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1583	10:26	s7n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι	1	Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1584	10:27	f9x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν	1	The pronoun him refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun he refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1585	10:27	kdva		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὑρίσκει	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found”
1586	10:27	twp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεληλυθότας πολλούς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1587	10:28	iyx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ	1	This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1588	10:28	k3we		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλοφύλῳ	1	Here, the term foreigner refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1589	10:28	ztt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term man is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1590	10:28	tl2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1591	10:29	x0p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μεταπεμφθείς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1592	10:29	x0v3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural	μετεπέμψασθέ	1	The word you is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]])
1593	10:30	mqv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου	1	Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1594	10:30	na4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας	1	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or Four days ago. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1595	10:30	pkhh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ταύτης τῆς ὥρας	1	Cornelius is using the term hour figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1596	10:30	x4m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	Cornelius is using the adjective ninth as a noun. ULT adds hour to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in 10:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1597	10:30	u1es		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in 10:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1598	10:30	p73u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1599	10:30	yy6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1600	10:30	oicx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ	1	Cornelius is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this man appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1601	10:30	g485		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ	1	Luke says in 10:3 that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him a man here because the angel appeared to him in human form. You could say that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1602	10:31	twnu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
1603	10:31	uep3			φησί	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
1604	10:31	heh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1605	10:31	s6nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word remembered does not imply that God had forgotten about these alms. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:4. Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1606	10:31	xd0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον	1	Here the word before is being used idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1607	10:32	jjnn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1608	10:32	ci31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1609	10:32	u1t6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ξενίζεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1610	10:32	jhzt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα & παρὰ θάλασσαν	1	Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1611	10:33	p5ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σέ & σύ & σοι	1	The word you is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1612	10:33	ruf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος	1	This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1613	10:33	lzie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Cornelius is using the word we to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1614	10:33	ry21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Cornelius is using the word before idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1615	10:33	xt4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1616	10:33	jc88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1617	10:34	cyn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀνοίξας & Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	It might seem that the expression opening his mouth … said contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1618	10:34	iii7			προσωπολήμπτης	1	Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
1619	10:34	ha31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός	1	As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1620	10:35	b5cr			ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
1621	10:35	j78e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1622	10:36	aac8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον	1	Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this word; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1623	10:36	ht1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Peter is using the term word figuratively to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1624	10:36	anlh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ	1	Peter is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1625	10:36	ok9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1626	10:36	md1l			πάντων	1	The word all could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
1627	10:37	wecw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ & ῥῆμα	1	Peter is using the term word figuratively to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1628	10:37	ch65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1629	10:37	sq2i			μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης	1	Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them”
1630	10:38	seli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1	It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1631	10:38	p2qi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1	Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1632	10:38	ku82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει	1	Peter speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1633	10:38	vuwo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐεργετῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1634	10:38	y5ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1635	10:38	tj3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	The expression was with him is an idiom. See how you translated it in 7:9. Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1636	10:39	kal7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες	1	Here, we refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1637	10:39	sx3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν	1	The pronoun whom refers to Jesus, and the pronoun they refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who conspired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1638	10:39	z4dt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says tree figuratively to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1639	10:40	zxuk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτον	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1640	10:40	cxj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	Here, raised … up is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1641	10:40	w8kv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1642	10:40	iz8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1643	10:41	nm81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you can adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1644	10:41	jq89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1645	10:41	zpyj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1646	10:41	xlbl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ	1	Peter is figuratively using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1647	10:41	q7d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1648	10:42	ik96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here, us refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1649	10:42	zne5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	Connecting Statement: By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1650	10:42	c1ak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1651	10:42	ws4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjectives living and dead as nouns. (The word living is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1652	10:43	ub5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1653	10:43	y6d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is speaking figuratively of the name of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1654	10:44	cz7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:16. Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
1655	10:44	wf7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also listening to his message, the word all refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1656	10:44	o839		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1657	10:45	j6wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & πιστοὶ	1	Luke is using the adjective faithful as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1658	10:45	qlpu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	Luke is using the term circumcision figuratively by association to identify these faithful people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1659	10:45	g161		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1660	10:45	mqs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκκέχυται	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1661	10:45	hfs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Luke is using a possessive form to identify the Holy Spirit as a gift from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1662	10:45	f33n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη	1	Here, also refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1663	10:45	rt18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὰ ἔθνη	1	Gentiles is a name for people who are not Jewish. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1664	10:46	p6pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλούντων γλώσσαις	1	The implication is that at least some of these languages were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1665	10:47	zktm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding is he. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1666	10:47	u5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1667	10:47	vuax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb withhold and the negative particle not. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1668	10:47	df24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ ὕδωρ	1	Peter is figuratively using water, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1669	10:47	kwv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1670	10:48	l8ci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1	The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1671	10:48	z4fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1672	10:48	ax6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι	1	Here, in the name is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in 10:43. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:48. Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1673	11:intro	hva5				0
1674	11:1	ab75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1675	11:1	f1md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	2	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1676	11:1	bisb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	2	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1677	11:1	w3rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter shared with Cornelius and his guests by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1678	11:2	kb4m			ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke says that Peter came up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1679	11:2	yar6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	As in 10:45, Luke is using the term circumcision figuratively by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1680	11:3	pcce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς.	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1681	11:3	zmou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς	1	This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these men. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1682	11:3	ah7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας	1	The phrase men having foreskins refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1683	11:4	aakb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς	1	Luke is using the word beginning to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1684	11:5	dtt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθιεμένην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1685	11:6	lbh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	From Peter’s response in 11:8, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in 10:12. Alternate translation: “ … and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1686	11:7	gm0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	Luke speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1687	11:7	ag7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάς	1	Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1688	11:8	m4mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μηδαμῶς	1	Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. See how you translated this in 10:14. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1689	11:8	nbju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “food that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1690	11:8	m5p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the common or unclean, like some of those animals,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1691	11:8	wwbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the word never and the negative terms common and unclean. Alternate translation: “only what is holy and clean has ever entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1692	11:8	j0rv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	Peter is figuratively using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1693	11:9	b24j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1694	11:9	txbl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	The voice is adding the pronoun you for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1695	11:10	xrq6			τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in 10:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1696	11:10	s2ik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνεσπάσθη & ἅπαντα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1697	11:11	ias8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἦμεν	1	General Information: The term we refers to Peter and the others in the house in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1698	11:11	b2qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς	1	Peter is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on how soon after his vision ended these three men arrived. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “right then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1699	11:11	k44j			ἐξαυτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
1700	11:11	qwn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1701	11:12	lf6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν διακρίναντα	1	This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” See how you translated this in 10:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1702	11:12	xrc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι	1	Peter is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1703	11:12	w6ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Peter implicitly means the house of Cornelius. Alternate translation: “the house of the man who had sent the messengers to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1704	11:13	mwzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	The term us refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1705	11:13	few6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in 10:32. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1706	11:14	rwpw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1	The angel is using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1707	11:14	fnjz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὲ & σωθήσῃ σὺ & σου	1	All the instances of the words you and your in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1708	11:14	p3gk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1709	11:14	hpr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	Here, house refers figuratively to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1710	11:15	a8jw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν	1	Peter is using the word began to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1711	11:15	ak2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it fell on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in 8:16 and 10:44. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1712	11:15	qdon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1713	11:15	qy12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	General Information: Here the word us refers to Peter himself and to the believers he is speaking to in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1714	11:15	th4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	By in the beginning, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1715	11:16	xd9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ῥήματος	1	Peter is using the term word figuratively to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1716	11:16	wwnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to chapter 1, and see how you translated this in 1:5. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1717	11:16	v116		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1718	11:17	pe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here the word us refers to Peter himself and to the believers he is speaking to in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1719	11:17	y7ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν	1	Peter is referring to the gift of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the gift of the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us when we believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1720	11:17	u3nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	Peter is using the question form to convince his listeners that God wanted him to accept the Gentile believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1721	11:17	xpsl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	For emphasis, Peter is adding the pronoun you, which is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with verbs but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1722	11:17	ot1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	It may be helpful to indicate in what way Peter thought he might have hindered God. Alternate translation: “to hinder God by refusing to welcome and baptize people to whom he had given his own Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1723	11:18	xlpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡσύχασαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter was speaking. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers became quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1724	11:18	nr7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡσύχασαν	1	This is an idiom that means they no longer argued. Alternate translation: “they no longer argue with Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1725	11:18	z3fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of repentance and life, you could express the same idea in other ways. Here the term life refers to everlasting life. Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles as well to repent and live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1726	11:19	bwb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	οὖν	1	Luke uses the word translated Then to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1727	11:19	whm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the persecution that Luke describes in 8:1, which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1728	11:19	w3wq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοινίκης	1	The word Phoenicia is the name of a region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1729	11:19	ig50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κύπρου	1	The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in 4:36. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1730	11:19	zbml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1731	11:19	c8ha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	μηδενὶ λαλοῦντες τὸν λόγον εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις	1	Since Luke says here that the scattered believers spoke about Jesus only to Jews, but he says in the next verse that some of them spoke to “Greeks” (that is, Gentiles), it might appear in your language that Luke was contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Most of them believed they should speak the message about Jesus only to Jews, so that is what they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
1732	11:20	ogva		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Κύπριοι καὶ Κυρηναῖοι	1	Luke is describing these men in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “Cypriot and Cyrenian men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1733	11:20	k6si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κύπριοι	1	The word Cypriots is the name for people who come from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1734	11:20	tz12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κυρηναῖοι	1	The word Cyrenians is the name for people who come from the city of Cyrene. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1735	11:20	mww9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls Greeks were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1736	11:21	ebxq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	χεὶρ Κυρίου	1	In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says the Lord. In 4:29–30, the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1737	11:21	aj5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χεὶρ	1	Here, the hand figuratively represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1738	11:21	bfm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	When Luke says that God with* the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1739	11:21	n9pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	Luke speaks figuratively of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically turned to the Lord. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1740	11:21	qcn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1741	11:22	i7vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἠκούσθη & ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1	In your language, the expression was heard in the ears might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1742	11:22	kcb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “the church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1743	11:22	rdhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1744	11:22	oa8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & ἐξαπέστειλαν	1	The pronoun them refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun they refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1745	11:23	b7w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1746	11:23	bz6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας	1	Here the heart figuratively represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1747	11:24	b9a8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1748	11:24	he5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke speaks figuratively of Barnabas as if he were a container that was full of the Holy Spirit and of faith. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1749	11:24	m7yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who believed firmly in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1750	11:24	e35e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1751	11:24	e57t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke figuratively says the Lord (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1752	11:25	yhl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1753	11:26	qzml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1754	11:26	z36c			ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year”
1755	11:26	w4dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1756	11:26	x8gx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι & τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1757	11:26	w0sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Χριστιανούς	1	The word Christians is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1758	11:26	r6sl			πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
1759	11:27	h6zw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1760	11:27	kep8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταύταις & ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Luke is using the word days idiomatically to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1761	11:27	d8bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that these prophets came down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1762	11:28	q3tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Alternate Here, having arisen means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that”
1763	11:28	w18f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	The term whole is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1764	11:28	pd2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by world, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1765	11:28	jmc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου	1	The expression upon Claudius is an idiom. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1766	11:28	fjyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κλαυδίου	1	The word Claudius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1767	11:29	rk9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν & μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν & πέμψαι	1	The implication is that while some of the disciples were prospering greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1768	11:29	up7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1769	11:29	qlsi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “to the brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1770	11:30	taw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the elders who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1771	11:30	l8i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	Here, the hand, one part of a person, figuratively represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1772	11:30	rq2w			διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	If you retain the figurative word hand in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul”
1773	12:intro	f66j				0	Acts 12 General Notes Structure and formatting Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul back were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25-30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod.
1774	12:1	ti1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1775	12:1	f2gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν	1	The phrase that time implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1776	12:1	aqd0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἡρῴδης	1	The word Herod is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 4:27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1777	12:1	zy6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	The expression laid on hands figuratively means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. See how you translated it in 5:18. Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1778	12:1	og4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest some from the church. Luke is speaking figuratively of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1779	12:2	i7zy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάκωβον & Ἰωάννου	1	The words James and John are the names of men. See how you translated them in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1780	12:2	r1zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον	1	It was probably not Herod himself who killed James. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he had his soldiers execute James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1781	12:3	v4ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1782	12:3	ly66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	This phrase refers to the time of a Jewish religious observance that led up to the celebration of Passover. While it was observed on specific days, Luke is likely using the word “days” idiomatically to describe a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the Passover season” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1783	12:4	tza2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν	1	The pronouns whom refers to Peter, and the pronoun he refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1784	12:4	pps1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν	1	These quaternions were groups of four soldiers each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1785	12:4	i23a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	The phrase to bring him out is an idiom. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1786	12:5	xpcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ & Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1787	12:5	f8qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1788	12:6	km83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν	1	Here, the word translated to bring … out is slightly different from the word translated that same way in 12:4. It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1789	12:6	g2bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1790	12:7	i7g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this angel appeared. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1791	12:9	wqct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου;	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1792	12:9	p9ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the angel was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1793	12:9	s9j0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐδόκει & ὅραμα βλέπειν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1794	12:10	r7gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διελθόντες & πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1795	12:10	e36s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ δευτέραν	1	The word guard can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1796	12:11	wlb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν	1	The phrase having come to himself is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1797	12:11	ue4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χειρὸς	1	Here, hand figuratively represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1798	12:11	p739		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of expectation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1799	12:11	sl07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Luke is likely using the phrase the Jewish people to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1800	12:12	jds2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρίας	1	The word Mary is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1801	12:12	dn16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωάννου & Μάρκου	1	The words John and Mark are two names of the same man. Mark is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1802	12:12	ux4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1803	12:12	c1ur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἱκανοὶ	1	Luke is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1804	12:13	pfn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	To “knock” at a door means to hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1805	12:13	c634		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	Here, the word gate probably describes an entrance from the street to a courtyard in front of the house. If houses in your culture have a similar entrance, in your translation you could use the name in your language for it. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1806	12:13	vbjj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥόδη	1	The word Rhoda is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1807	12:14	y2ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1808	12:15	j2kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1809	12:15	qa8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ	1	Some Jews believed in guardian angels, and the people inside thehouse may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you saw was Peter’s guardian angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1810	12:16	wwg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	While the word they refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1811	12:17	fr3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰακώβῳ	1	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by James, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1812	12:17	k3lg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰακώβῳ	1	The word James is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for different men in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1813	12:17	jf16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1814	12:17	wdj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1815	12:18	ail9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1816	12:18	zl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1817	12:18	bt2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1818	12:18	plyg			τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	The word translated become can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone” or, as a direct quotation, “Where then had Peter gone?”
1819	12:19	blx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun him refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1820	12:19	pz6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν	1	It was probably not Herod himself who searched for Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1821	12:19	br16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	Luke speaks of Herod having gone down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1822	12:20	aip7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1823	12:20	l5gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦν & θυμομαχῶν	1	The pronoun he refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1824	12:20	osyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τυρίοις & Σιδωνίοις	1	Tyrians is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and Sidonians is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1825	12:20	mpgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1826	12:20	gxs4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1827	12:20	oln5			ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”
1828	12:20	qsg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βλάστον	1	The word Blastus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1829	12:20	qqj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως	1	This phrase indicates that Blastus was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1830	12:20	l5r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1831	12:20	j253		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1832	12:20	dy51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	The implication is that Herod had stopped supplying food to the people of Tyre and Sidon because he was angry with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply, and Herod had cut off that supply because he was angry with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1833	12:21	e3w9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ	1	The implication is that this was the day on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1834	12:21	kv7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Putting on this royal clothing, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the throne were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1835	12:21	g6ir			καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	The throne was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
1836	12:23	iw57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1837	12:22	feyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου	1	The people are figuratively using one part of Herod, his voice, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1838	12:23	d419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	The word translated worm-eaten is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word worm-eaten expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1839	12:23	pjbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel struck Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word struck is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1840	12:24	sv8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with and. The verb being multiplied tells in what way the word of God was increasing, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1841	12:24	m1sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were increasing and being multiplied. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1842	12:24	wn8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1843	12:24	iwr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπληθύνετο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1844	12:25	j2un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	0	Luke uses the word translated Then to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. You language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1845	12:25	rt9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	0	This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they returned to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1846	12:25	t7d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading to is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1847	12:25	pv6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1	This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in 11:29-30. Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1848	12:25	zhsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in 12:12. Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1849	13:intro	rlh6				0	Acts 13 General Notes Structure and formatting Verses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus. Verses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus. Verses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41. The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul. Special concepts in this chapter A light for the Gentiles The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia In verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term our to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1850	13:1	fij7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1851	13:1	srw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ	1	The word Simeon is the name of a man. The word Niger is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1852	13:1	nqp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1853	13:1	ccel		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαναήν	1	The word Manaen is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1854	13:1	o8jb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος	1	The word Lucius is the name of a man. The word Cyrenian is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in 11:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1855	13:1	u48c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σύντροφος	1	In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the foster brother of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1856	13:1	hxh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου	1	In the Roman Empire, a tetrarch was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. Herod the tetrarch ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1857	13:2	m70r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	λειτουργούντων & αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	The expression ministering to is an idiom. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1858	13:2	ifb9			ἀφορίσατε	1	Alternate translation: “Set apart”
1859	13:2	j6ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς.	1	The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the work of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1860	13:3	l0cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν	1	The pronouns their and they refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun them refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase having fasted and prayed refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1861	13:3	ku45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς	1	The believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul as a symbolic action to show that they were sending them on their mission with the blessing and support of the whole church and that they were entrusting them to God’s care. Alternate translation: “placed their hands on them as a sign of blessing and support and as a way of entrusting them to God’s care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1862	13:3	p1us		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέλυσαν	1	While in this context the term released basically means “sent off,” the implication is that the believers in Antioch were freeing Barnabas and Saul of all of their responsibilities in the church so that they could go on the mission on which the Holy Spirit was sending them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gave them the freedom to go on their new mission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1863	13:4	abcj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	The pronoun they refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1864	13:4	pisj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had sent them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1865	13:4	iyh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that Barnabas and Saul went down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1866	13:4	d1q5			Σελεύκιαν	1	The word Seleucia is the name of a city that is on the seacoast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1867	13:5	at85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαλαμῖνι	1	The word Salamis is the name of a city on the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1868	13:5	ct8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1869	13:6	cl2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάφου	1	The word Paphos is the name of a major city on the island of Cyprus. It was where the Roman proconsul lived. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1870	13:6	zf3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὗρον	1	The word found does not mean that Barnabas, Saul, and Mark were intentionally searching for a certain man. They happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “they happened to meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1871	13:6	xe7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον	1	The word magician here does not mean someone who entertains others with tricks based on slight of hand and optical illusions. It means someone who practices witchcraft or supernatural magic arts. Your language and culture may have a term for such a person that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1872	13:6	ak38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς	1	The words Bar Jesus are a name that means “Son of Jesus.” However, there was no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1873	13:7	s1su		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ ἀνθυπάτῳ	1	A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1874	13:7	pf5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σεργίῳ Παύλῳ	1	The words Sergius and Paulus are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1875	13:7	h5xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ	1	Luke provides this background information about Sergius Paulus to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1876	13:7	abck			οὗτος, προσκαλεσάμενος	1	Alternate translation: “The proconsul summoned”
1877	13:8	lp2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος	1	The word Elymas is an Arabic word that Bar-Jesus was using as another name. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, the Magician. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1878	13:8	qw4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for that is the meaning of his name in Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1879	13:8	w2xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως	1	Here, to turn … away from is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1880	13:9	ey6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαῦλος & ὁ καὶ Παῦλος	1	The word Paul is the name of a man. It is another name by which Saul called himself. Saul was his Jewish name, and Paul was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. (From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts.) Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1881	13:9	fy7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1882	13:9	w3lh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit was inspiring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1883	13:10	un00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	Paul is using the adjective full as a noun, to identify Elymas as a person who is figuratively full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1884	13:10	u8n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of deceit and trickery, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “O you who are always deceiving and tricking other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1885	13:10	r8x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	Paul is speaking figuratively of Elymas as if he were a container that was full of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1886	13:10	wq5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	The terms deceit and wickedness mean similar things. Paul may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “of all evil treachery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1887	13:10	kdwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	Paul says all in these two instances as a generalization for emphasis. (But when he calls Elymas the enemy of all righteousness, that may be understood more literally.) Alternate translation: “of great deceit and great trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1888	13:10	d2pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	The expression son of figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1889	13:10	jgq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	Paul is drawing an implicit contrast between Elymas’s claim to be the “son of Jesus” (Bar Jesus) and his actual character as a son of the devil. If you retain the “son of” idiom in your translation, you could bring out this contrast explicitly. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are not the son of Jesus, you are the son of the devil!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1890	13:10	hlq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is speaking of righteousness figuratively as if it were a person who could have an enemy. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1891	13:10	wa8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enemy of everything that is right” or “opposed to everything that is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1892	13:10	bc9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας?	1	Paul is using the question form to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1893	13:10	p8sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας	1	Paul is speaking figuratively of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting paths that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went straight. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1894	13:11	q0w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul is using the term behold to focus Elymas’s attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1895	13:11	xul9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ	1	Here, the word hand represents the power of God, and the phrase upon you indicates punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord is going to punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1896	13:11	w3gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τυφλὸς, μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον	1	Paul is using a word and a phrase together to express a single idea. The phrase not seeing the sun tells to what degree Elymas will be blind. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “so blind that you will not be able to tell whether it is day or night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1897	13:11	t7j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	Paul is speaking figuratively of this mist and darkness as if they were going to fall on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1898	13:11	x7rt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	Luke may be using the two words mist and darkness together to express a single idea. The word mist may tell what kind of darkness was all that Elymas could see. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “a misty darkness was all that Elymas could see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1899	13:12	x9fl			ὁ ἀνθύπατος	1	A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “the governor”
1900	13:12	twa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1901	13:12	ob5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the word teaching figuratively to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1902	13:12	efle		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	In this possessive form, the Lord is the object rather than the subject of teaching. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1903	13:12	glyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1904	13:13	r9hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1905	13:13	i65t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	The phrase those around Paul refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in 13:46, 13:50, etc. The order of names is important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1906	13:13	abcl			οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	Alternate translation: “Paul and his traveling companions”
1907	13:13	mmj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας	1	The word Perga is the name of a city, and the word Pamphylia is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1908	13:14	et2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1909	13:14	vrp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν	1	The word Antioch is the name of a city. See how you translated the same name for a different city in 6:5. The word Perga is the name of the province in which this city of Antioch was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1910	13:14	c21u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκάθισαν	1	Paul and Barnabas may have sat down in the place where rabbis would sit, or in the way that rabbis would sit, as a way of asking permission to speak to the congregation. The fact that they were invited to speak (13:15) suggests that this is the case. Alternate translation: “sat down as rabbis would, to ask permission to speak to the congregation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1911	13:15	dnb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	The word Law is the name for one part of the Hebrew Scriptures, and word Prophets is the name for another part of the Hebrew Scriptures. Even though these are common nouns, Luke is using them to mean specific things. Show this in your translation in the way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1912	13:15	kno1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” or “You brothers of ours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1913	13:15	td4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	The synagogue leaders are using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1914	13:15	jru8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	The synagogue leaders are using the term word to mean what Barnabas or Paul would want to say using words. Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1915	13:15	kj1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	λέγετε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates an invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an invitation. Alternate translation: “we invite you to speak it now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1916	13:16	keqb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the term arising means that Paul stood up to show that he indeed wanted to speak, as he had been invited to do. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:14. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he wanted to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1917	13:16	i8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ	1	This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He wanted everyone in the synagogue to hear what he had to say from the very first word, so he did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1918	13:16	m0yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται, καὶ οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Israelites and you who fear God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1919	13:16	rh93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. That is what Paul means here. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:2. Alternate translation: “you Gentiles who sincerely worship the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1920	13:16	ah55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀκούσατε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1921	13:17	se2b			ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ	1	Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”
1922	13:17	tbc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form of the word our here and in verses 32 and 33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1923	13:17	l9cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Paul is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1924	13:17	aaj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν	1	When Paul says that God exalted the people of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring figuratively to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1925	13:17	vw4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ	1	Here, an uplifted arm figuratively describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1926	13:18	zv9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς	1	This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. If the reading put up with them is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in 13:40–41. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1927	13:19	nvp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, the pronoun them refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun their refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1928	13:20	xyg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1929	13:20	qmc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου	1	This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** figuratively represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1930	13:20	tb5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαμουὴλ	1	The wordSamuel is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1931	13:21	nrug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὸν Σαοὺλ & Κείς & Βενιαμείν	1	The word Saul is the name of a man. The word Kish is the name of another man, the father of Saul. The word Benjamin is the name of one of the tribes of Israel, to which Saul belonged. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1932	13:21	yxi8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1933	13:22	bsp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα	1	Here, the expression raised up describes God giving someone an important position. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “made David their king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1934	13:22	akg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου	1	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel 13:14 and Psalm 89:20.) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1935	13:22	dbu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὗρον	1	While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word found does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1936	13:22	jf03		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῦ Ἰεσσαί	1	The word Jesse is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1937	13:22	mp53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου	1	This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1938	13:23	xj5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1939	13:23	vnz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ σπέρματος	1	The term seed figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1940	13:23	l50d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτου	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1941	13:23	kc76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here, Israel refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1942	13:24	wbpf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1	By John, Paul is referring implicitly to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1943	13:24	xzf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	In your language, the expression before the face of his entrance, meaning “before the appearance of his entry into ministry” (see next two notes), might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “before he appeared” or “before he entered into his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1944	13:24	abcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	Here the term face figuratively means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1945	13:24	igpi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	By entrance, Paul is figuratively to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1946	13:24	gqs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun his refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’ entrance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1947	13:24	x892		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a baptism that people received to show that they were repenting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1948	13:25	ntrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν δρόμον	1	Paul is speaking figuratively of John as if he had been running a race or course. Alternate translation: “his work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1949	13:25	judg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἔλεγεν, τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it might be good to present this quotation from John the Baptist as a direct quotation if possible, since it uses several figures of speech that might not sound natural in an indirect quotation. (As an indirect quotation, this would read something like this: “he asked the people who they thought he was, and he told them he was not he and that behold, one was coming after him, the sandals of whose feet he was not worthy to untie.”) You may be able to indicate the beginning of Paul’s quotation from John with some punctuation or convention that your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1950	13:25	vww3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι?	1	John is using the question form to challenge his listeners’ idea of who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not who you think I am!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1951	13:25	rp32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ	1	The pronoun he refers to the Messiah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1952	13:25	nnl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	John is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1953	13:25	gys2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1954	13:25	gj98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν	1	In your language, the expression the sandals of his feet might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1955	13:26	bwet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1956	13:26	kci9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1957	13:26	c9pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοὶ	1	Paul is using the term sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1958	13:26	jdp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here the word us includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1959	13:26	u6zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent the word about this salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1960	13:26	zx08		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	Paul is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1961	13:26	v6r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God is saving people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1962	13:27	s64d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1963	13:27	psk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1964	13:27	ri1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν	1	Paul is using the word voices figuratively to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1965	13:27	m4tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1966	13:27	i6jo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of the prophets on each Sabbath in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1967	13:28	v3hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν	1	General Information: Here the word they refThe pronoun they refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])ers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him here refers to Jesus.
1968	13:28	iect		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1969	13:29	sq1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets had written about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1970	13:29	m5f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	It may be helpful to say explicitly that Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “taking him down from the tree after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1971	13:29	vwt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ξύλου	1	The word translated tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Paul is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “from the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1972	13:30	h5jw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	Paul uses the word But to indicate a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1973	13:30	zsx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1974	13:30	mqx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1975	13:31	zesg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The pronoun who refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1976	13:31	ig7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1977	13:31	g4vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμέρας πλείους	1	We know from other writings tWe know from the Gospels that this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])hat this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.
1978	13:31	rw9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν	1	Paul says having come up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the ones who traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1979	13:32	h6ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a promise that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1980	13:32	hr2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Paul is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1981	13:33	b1uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	God has fulfilled this for our children	1	It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. You could say something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1982	13:33	t0wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταύτην	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by this, he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1983	13:33	dy6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. Paul would also speak of God fulfilling a promise he made for the children of the people to whom he made the promise, not for the children of others. If the reading for our children is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1984	13:33	t176		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term children figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1985	13:33	d95n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	Here, raising up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1986	13:33	y3tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1987	13:33	h9ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1988	13:33	ljnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Psalm 2 as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1989	13:33	c1pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “You are my Son, yes, today I have fathered you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1990	13:33	tla1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε	1	Son is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1991	13:34	zhjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν & εἴρηκεν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, and the pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus … God has spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1992	13:34	je9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “he brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1993	13:34	h3nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1994	13:34	ipb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά	1	This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and ultimately the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1995	13:34	q3kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὰ ὅσια & τὰ πιστά	1	Paul is using the adjectives holy and trustworthy as nouns. ULT adds the word things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the trustworthy promises that God made to David as the ancestor of the Holy One” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1996	13:35	r1ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἑτέρῳ	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by another place, he means another place in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in another place in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1997	13:35	gl8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ & λέγει	1	Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun he refers to God, as in 13:34. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1998	13:35	d4px		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1999	13:35	jvpy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2000	13:35	hvt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	Paul is using the word see idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2001	13:35	bhos		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2002	13:36	rpb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase fell asleep. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2003	13:36	nwy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2004	13:36	f5s2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2005	13:36	la5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Paul is using the word saw idiomatically to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2006	13:36	okfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2007	13:37	bmw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃν & ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2008	13:37	n9pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2009	13:37	j52x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Paul is using the word see idiomatically to mean “experience.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2010	13:37	g3ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2011	13:38	yg35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
2012	13:38	f917		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2013	13:38	qy18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word brothers as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2014	13:38	an8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτου	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2015	13:38	t3i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we are proclaiming forgiveness of sins to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2016	13:38	w7y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “release of sins is proclaimed to you, and release is also proclaimed to you from the guilt of everything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2017	13:38	xjzi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2018	13:39	g5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2019	13:39	ki8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2020	13:40	y2kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βλέπετε	1	Paul is using the term Look figuratively to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2021	13:40	tt1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2022	13:40	osou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ ἐπέλθῃ	1	Paul is speaking figuratively of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could come upon his listeners. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2023	13:41	kk1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1	This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2024	13:41	jveu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἴδετε	1	Paul is using the term Look figuratively to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2025	13:41	xcdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφανίσθητε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2026	13:41	dvn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔργον ἐργάζομαι & ἔργον	1	God is using the word work figuratively to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2027	13:41	nm2q			ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν	1	God is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2028	13:42	ax8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν	1	Here the pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2029	13:42	f3sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρεκάλουν	1	Here the pronoun they refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2030	13:42	w9h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2031	13:42	y4p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	Here, words refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2032	13:43	a58z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2033	13:43	sws7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	προσηλύτων	1	These proselytes were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “convert to Judaism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2034	13:43	mygk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠκολούθησαν & τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ	1	In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2035	13:43	fv15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2036	13:44	vq3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις	1	The city represents the people in the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2037	13:44	h40t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2038	13:44	yga7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2039	13:44	evox		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2040	13:44	ax95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2041	13:45	j4zq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2042	13:45	qrh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	For emphasis, Luke is speaking figuratively of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy filled. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2043	13:45	m1an		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2044	13:46	d08v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2045	13:46	jn55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul and Barnabas are using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2046	13:46	as6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑμῖν & πρῶτον	1	Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2047	13:46	lly5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν	1	Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2048	13:46	ms36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς	1	Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you are not worthy of eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2049	13:46	kzm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul and Barnabas are using the term behold to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2050	13:46	rf9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	Paul and Barnabas are speaking figuratively as if they are going to be physically turning toward the Gentiles. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2051	13:46	zvt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	στρεφόμεθα	1	By we, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2052	13:47	tx94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	By us, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2053	13:47	so6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ὁ Κύριος	1	Paul and Barnabas are referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2054	13:47	xbiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2055	13:47	v8au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς	1	Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a light that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2056	13:47	za1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σε	1	The word you is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2057	13:47	t5sp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶναί & εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2058	13:47	ismw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	This phrase is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2059	13:48	e9ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2060	13:48	yr6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2061	13:48	jct2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τεταγμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2062	13:49	qh9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2063	13:49	h5pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2064	13:49	fpkr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2065	13:50	u8rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2066	13:50	ef21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρώτρυναν	1	Luke says figuratively that the Jewish leaders stirred up these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2067	13:50	f5yd			τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας	1	Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue”
2068	13:50	wmm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πρώτους	1	Luke is using the adjective principal as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word ones to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2069	13:50	uc54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun they refers to the influential women and important men, not to the Jewish leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the influential women and important men threw them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2070	13:50	cq9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	Like is likely speaking figuratively when he says that they threw them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2071	13:50	kzzk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia figuratively by association with the way that it had boundaries and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2072	13:51	abco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2073	13:51	xi1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2074	13:51	fvop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰκόνιον	1	The word Iconium is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2075	13:52	dp5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἵ & μαθηταὶ	1	Here, the disciples implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2076	13:52	hhgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking figuratively of these disciples as if they were a container that joy and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2077	14:intro	rsg2				0	Acts 14 General Notes \r\r## Structure and formatting \r\r- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.\r- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.\r- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter \r\r### “the word of his grace” \r\rThe expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) \r\r### Zeus and Hermes \r\rIn this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) \r\r## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter \r\r### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” \r\rJesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encourage the new believers in the cities that they had visited.\r
2078	14:1	hk1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2079	14:1	f4sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλῆσαι	1	It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2080	14:2	wc4x			οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
2081	14:2	n2pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπήγειραν	1	Luke says figuratively that these Jewsstirred up the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2082	14:2	k8mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their souls, to mean all of them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2083	14:2	fu13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2084	14:3	a3gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὖν	1	Luke uses the word But here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2085	14:3	fifi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2086	14:3	f2xh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2087	14:3	wcn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2088	14:3	c2cv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2089	14:3	p9iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	Here, hands figuratively represents the capability of a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2090	14:4	btu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2091	14:4	q1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2092	14:5	q6g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς	1	Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word stone tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to mistreat Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “hostilely to stone them to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2093	14:6	tpl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Λυκαονίας	1	The word Lycaonia is the name of a district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2094	14:6	m5gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λύστραν	1	The word Lystra is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and north of Derbe. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2095	14:6	tl4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δέρβην	1	The wordDerbe is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2096	14:8	wb5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2097	14:8	kz7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν	1	Luke is referring figuratively to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their feet when their legs are strong. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2098	14:8	tca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is referring figuratively to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the womb of his mother when he was born. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2099	14:9	di49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν	1	The pronouns he and him refer to the lame man, and the pronoun who refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2100	14:9	xak4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2101	14:9	uwov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean healed.) Alternate translation: “he could trusting Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2102	14:10	i2kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & ἥλατο	1	The first instance of the pronoun He refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2103	14:10	tect		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός	1	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
2104	14:10	sagd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός	1	It might seem that the expression stand … on your feet contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “Stand up straight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2105	14:10	v1kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἥλατο	1	The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2106	14:11	isyz			ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
2107	14:11	lvs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	The phrase raised up their voice is an idiom that means that the crowds spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they said loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2108	14:11	dw4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Λυκαονιστὶ λέγοντες, οἱ θεοὶ ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις, κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying in Lycaonian that the gods, having been made like men, had come down to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2109	14:11	x3bi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λυκαονιστὶ	1	The word Lycaonian is the name of the language that was spoken in district District of Lycaonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2110	14:11	rm85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in human form” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2111	14:12	t7uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δία	1	The word Zeus is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2112	14:12	hh25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἑρμῆν	1	The word Hermes is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2113	14:12	i1fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν,	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2114	14:12	d9lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2115	14:12	l63q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου	1	Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2116	14:13	iz6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως	1	Luke is using the name Zeus figuratively to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus that was before the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2117	14:13	sh4o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως	1	Here, before means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2118	14:13	v2a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταύρους καὶ στέμματα	1	The implication is that the priest had put these wreaths on the oxen because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2119	14:13	ud37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤθελεν θύειν	1	Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2120	14:14	kx43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν	1	Barnabas and Paul tore their clothes as a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “during their clothing to show how distressed they were that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2121	14:14	wa4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	κράζοντες	1	Together with the word “saying” in the next verse, the phrase “crying out” expresses a single idea. The phrase crying out tells how Barnabas and Paul were saying what they said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2122	14:15	ee13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women and Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “you people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2123	14:15	w4fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε?	1	Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2124	14:15	u9pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι	1	People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings, not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2125	14:15	n98g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	Paul and Barnabas are speaking figuratively as if they want the people in Lystra physically to turn from idol worship and believe in the one true God. The metaphor of turning means to stop living in one way and to start living in another way. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2126	14:15	blhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τούτων τῶν ματαίων	1	Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective useless as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2127	14:15	qr5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	This expression is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand its meaning, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2128	14:15	lw9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2129	14:16	vpt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	This is a metaphor that refers figuratively to how people live their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2130	14:17	kig8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative preposition without. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2131	14:17	c1se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς	1	It might seem that the expression rains from the sky contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “rain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2132	14:17	ps9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	filling your hearts	1	Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their hearts, figuratively meaning their desi misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2133	14:17	en5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word gladness tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2134	14:19	wmc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	It may be helpful to state explicitly what they persuaded the crowds to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn hostilely against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2135	14:20	aqx3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & εἰσῆλθεν & ἐξῆλθεν	1	The pronouns him and he refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2136	14:21	lint		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς	1	Luke is using the adjective many as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2137	14:22	ek9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	Here, souls refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2138	14:22	zkd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2139	14:22	d9ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2140	14:22	ci6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun kingdom with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2141	14:22	wu1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	By us, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and of the believers they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2142	14:23	pk5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	χειροτονήσαντες & παρέθεντο & πεπιστεύκεισαν	1	The pronoun them refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun they refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2143	14:23	mqp9			κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν	1	Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers”
2144	14:23	n81l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2145	14:25	t513		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2146	14:25	h8sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν	1	Luke says that Paul and Barnabas went down to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2147	14:26	f2cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2148	14:26	p2gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had ask God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2149	14:27	vcd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀνήγγελλον & αὐτῶν & ἤνοιξεν	1	The pronouns they and them refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun he refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2150	14:27	qcl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God had done something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership with God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2151	14:27	vymy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	Here, the possessive form describes not a door consisting of faith but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2152	14:27	b4id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	Here the expression opened a door figuratively means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2153	14:27	xgvb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2154	14:28	abcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2155	15:intro	h917				0	Acts 15 General Notes Structure and formatting Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses. Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) Special concepts in this chapter Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses? Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
2156	15:1	su66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τινες	1	Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2157	15:1	p3k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2158	15:1	zi1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2159	15:1	pm8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2160	15:1	lwbi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2161	15:2	abcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, not, together with a word, little, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2162	15:2	f9nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως	1	The terms dispute and debate mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation, as in UST: “an argument” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2163	15:2	w6tc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτοὺς & ἔταξαν & ἐξ αὐτῶν	1	The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun they and the second instance of the pronoun them refer to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2164	15:2	ek6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Luke says to go up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2165	15:3	av5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2166	15:3	aia5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Luke is figuratively using the phrase the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2167	15:3	rk37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of conversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how many of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2168	15:3	nje7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2169	15:3	bbd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2170	15:3	c03o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	The word all here may be a generalization for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “to the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2171	15:4	ej1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2172	15:4	jblr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	Luke is figuratively using the phrase the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the apostles and elders separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2173	15:4	a2x1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated this same expression in 14:27. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2174	15:5	kras		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Φαρισαίων	1	The name Pharisee describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. See how you translated it in 5:34. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2175	15:5	zcv0			πεπιστευκότες	1	Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus”
2176	15:5	crr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐξανέστησαν	1	These believers stood up to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2177	15:5	efe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & παραγγέλλειν	1	Both instances of the pronoun them refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in 15:3. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2178	15:6	gqt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθησάν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2179	15:6	ugu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν περὶ	1	Here the phrase to see about is an idiom that means “to consider.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2180	15:6	vcsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2181	15:7	zhco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς Πέτρος	1	Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2182	15:7	c2q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2183	15:7	s6ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2184	15:7	a6q9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Peter is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2185	15:7	wct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν	1	Both occurrences of you are plural, since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]])
2186	15:7	hk4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	Peter is stating the pronoun you, which is already implied in the verb know, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2187	15:7	ftl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων	1	Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2188	15:7	s3wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	Peter is figuratively using one part of himself, his mouth, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2189	15:7	b5s8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Peter is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that he shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2190	15:8	m1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδιογνώστης	1	Here, the word heart figuratively refers to a person’s character and intentions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2191	15:8	p6d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς	1	The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2192	15:8	abcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2193	15:8	wlzx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Peter is using the word us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2194	15:9	zs2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb distinguish, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2195	15:9	jr3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the word us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2196	15:9	ase1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally cleansed their hearts. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2197	15:9	yi8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word hearts figuratively represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them deeply because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2198	15:10	rfr4			νῦν	1	Now in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me”
2199	15:10	zaz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν & ?	1	Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not test God … !” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2200	15:10	ha45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς	1	Peter is using the words our and we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2201	15:10	n2bv			τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν & ?	1	Here the word testing means challenging. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:9. Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
2202	15:10	qpyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι	1	Peter is speaking figuratively as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a yoke on the necks of the Gentile believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2203	15:10	bdfu			bdfu	1	Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of neck. Alternate translation: “the necks”
2204	15:10	bfd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2205	15:11	e1m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι	1	Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun ourselves. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2206	15:11	q28c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2207	15:11	nhq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι	1	Peter is using the pronoun we and the implied pronoun ourselves to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2208	15:11	d3z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through what God has graciously done for us through the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2209	15:11	ln38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Peter means implicitly that we are saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2210	15:11	e96c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way they also will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2211	15:11	c8mw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κἀκεῖνοι	1	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the pronoun they to refer to the Gentiles. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2212	15:12	kxjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation, as in UST: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2213	15:13	odjm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων	1	Together the words answered and saying mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting headset to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2214	15:13	yqcm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάκωβος	1	The word James is the name of a man, the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. See how you translated it in 12:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2215	15:13	pl6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2216	15:14	jjyc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συμεὼν	1	The word Simeon is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2217	15:14	abct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο	1	James is speaking figuratively of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2218	15:14	pnr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term name figuratively to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term name figuratively to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2219	15:15	am6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν	1	James is using the term words figuratively to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2220	15:15	j4f5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2221	15:16	m3lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2222	15:16	h9um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀναστρέψω & ἀνοικοδομήσω & ἀνοικοδομήσω	1	The pronoun I refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2223	15:16	wqi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀναστρέψω	1	God is speaking figuratively of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now return. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2224	15:16	fhdr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2225	15:16	f5wf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	God is speaking figuratively of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a tent that had fallen down. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2226	15:16	u0r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2227	15:17	hkw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2228	15:17	pe4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2229	15:17	sm79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	God is speaking figuratively as if the Gentiles would literally seek or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2230	15:17	s6de		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2231	15:17	tu21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2232	15:17	c8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 15:14. (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2233	15:18	tr27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὰ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2234	15:19	pyb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	In your translation, you can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble these Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2235	15:19	vr6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	James is speaking figuratively of these Gentiles as if they are physically turning to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If your readers would misunderstand this expression, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2236	15:20	vcm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
2237	15:20	wx8f			τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of pollution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2238	15:20	qun9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2239	15:20	n6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	James is likely talking about food that has been offered to idols, and he is speaking figuratively as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2240	15:20	brc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1	James is using the adjective strangled as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2241	15:20	h27f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1	James is referring figuratively by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2242	15:20	j2rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1	God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they tocould not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “and from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2243	15:20	llys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood. Rather, he implicitly means that the Gentiles should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2244	15:21	si1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshipping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2245	15:21	zd7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς & ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει & ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	James is using the name Moses figuratively to mean the law associated with Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2246	15:21	wp1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2247	15:21	xg5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ πόλιν	1	The expression by city means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2248	15:22	hp6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	Here the word church figuratively describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2249	15:22	g6e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the church in Jerusalem. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “all the people of the church in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2250	15:22	c711		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	The words Judas and Barsabbas are the names of men. Barsabbas was another name by which Judas was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in 1:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2251	15:22	s6lv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2252	15:22	ywen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σιλᾶν	1	The word Silas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2253	15:22	s6d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2254	15:23	k6cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν	1	Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word hand figuratively you mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2255	15:23	xz3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	χειρὸς αὐτῶν	1	Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
2256	15:23	e4g2			οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν	1	This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
2257	15:23	kp51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὶ & ἀδελφοῖς	1	The apostles and elders are using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2258	15:23	php8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν	1	The words Syria and Cilicia are the names of Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2259	15:24	g8m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμῶν & οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1	Here and in the rest of the letter, by we and us (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2260	15:24	p1tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word some refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem would you dear, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2261	15:24	hbw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγοις	1	The apostles and elders are using the term words figuratively to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2262	15:24	bxq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to home they are writing, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2263	15:26	gldi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι	1	By men, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas have handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2264	15:26	dhj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν	1	The letter is using the term souls figuratively to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2265	15:26	dinn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν	1	The letter is speaking figuratively as if Paul and Barnabas have literally handed over their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2266	15:26	t7vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	This is a figurative expression. If your readers might misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the name of Jesus figuratively represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the name of Jesus figuratively represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2267	15:27	y972		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	y972	1	The letter is using the adjective same as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds thing to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2268	15:27	xw8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ λόγου	1	The letter is using the term word figuratively to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2269	15:28	l9z6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον & βάρος	1	The letter is speaking figuratively of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical burden that the Gentiles would need to carry. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2270	15:28	bx90		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2271	15:29	nt7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εἰδωλοθύτων	1	The letter is using the adjective sacrificed, with the qualifier to idols, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2272	15:29	vcc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	See how you translated this term in 15:20. Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2273	15:29	rt55			πνικτῶν	1	See how you translated this expression in 15:20. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2274	15:29	buy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔρρωσθε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2275	15:30	usz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2276	15:30	c3uk			οἱ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2277	15:30	t55a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that these four men came down to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2278	15:30	oh4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατῆλθον	1	You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2279	15:30	yl8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πλῆθος	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by the crowd, he means the people of the church in Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the people of the church in Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2280	15:31	k1mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐχάρησαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2281	15:31	e4gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of encouragement, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2282	15:32	r65l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες	1	When Luke says also, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were 13:1. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2283	15:32	e2en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2284	15:32	frea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ & καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2285	15:32	j99g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεστήριξαν	1	Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2286	15:33	v6im		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2287	15:33	wzw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2288	15:33	xv3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς	1	Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2289	15:35	anfc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. You language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2290	15:35	e7s4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2291	15:35	hnnb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2292	15:34	hkh0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants		0	As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2293	15:36	jjoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μετὰ & τινας ἡμέρας	1	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “after some time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2294	15:36	ib2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Paul is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2295	15:36	ua1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Paul is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2296	15:36	k08n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2297	15:36	y9i9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πῶς ἔχουσιν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2298	15:38	a5nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2299	15:39	u97a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων; τόν τε Βαρναβᾶν παραλαβόντα τὸν Μᾶρκον, ἐκπλεῦσαι εἰς Κύπρον	1	If your language does not use the passive form to be separated, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they separated from each other and Barnabas, taking Mark with him sailed away to Cyprus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2300	15:40	l2uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2301	15:40	tt2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χάριτι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2302	15:40	xkjo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2303	15:41	cbat		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διήρχετο	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2304	15:41	e3ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διήρχετο	1	Luke says he, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2305	15:41	s7yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	Luke is using the term churches to refer figuratively to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2306	15:41	tbv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2307	16:intro	e7z2				0	Acts 16 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Timothy’s circumcision Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised. The woman who had a spirit of divination Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
2308	16:1	km5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1	This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2309	16:1	f49m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος	1	Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2310	16:1	d4ka			Δέρβην	1	Derbe is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in Acts 14:6.
2311	16:1	u3vr			ἰδοὺ	1	The word behold alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.
2312	16:1	wxl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς	1	The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2313	16:2	t1lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2314	16:2	rez2			ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν	1	Here, brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers”
2315	16:3	p6z8			περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν	1	It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.
2316	16:3	za93			διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις	1	Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”
2317	16:3	hk2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν	1	Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2318	16:4	n46i			διεπορεύοντο & παρεδίδοσαν	1	The word they here refers to Paul, Silas (Acts 15:40), and Timothy (Acts 16:3).
2319	16:4	bu6r			αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν	1	Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey”
2320	16:4	gpi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2321	16:5	q8v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2322	16:5	lv4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2323	16:6	g97e			τὴν Φρυγίαν	1	Phrygia is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in Acts 2:10.
2324	16:6	ue3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2325	16:6	h4u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here, word stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2326	16:7	x1b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθόντες	1	Here, had come can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2327	16:7	b1xq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν	1	Mysia and Bithynia are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2328	16:7	b539			τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit”
2329	16:8	s6l1			κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα	1	The phrase came down is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.
2330	16:8	xq6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατέβησαν	1	Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2331	16:9	t6v2			ὅραμα & τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη	1	Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God”
2332	16:9	hq8e			παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him”
2333	16:9	cm2u			διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν	1	The phrase coming over is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas.
2334	16:10	fg5h			ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς	1	Here the words we and us refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts.
2335	16:11	m2p5			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip.
2336	16:11	q2pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Samothrace and Neapolis are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2337	16:12	tl9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	This colony was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2338	16:14	n952		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία	1	Here, a certain woman introduces Lydia as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2339	16:14	qj86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πορφυρόπωλις	1	Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2340	16:14	c6n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θυατείρων	1	Thyatira is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2341	16:14	cyk3			σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν	1	When Luke says Lydia was worshiping God, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws.
2342	16:14	rd4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν	1	For the Lord to cause someone to pay attention and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s heart. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2343	16:14	s9ju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here, heart stands for a person’s mind. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2344	16:14	ddx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	The author speaks about the heart or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2345	16:14	a74y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2346	16:15	g7e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2347	16:15	s799		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	Here, her household refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2348	16:16	ufy4			ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2349	16:16	vyn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη	1	This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2350	16:16	y1gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	παιδίσκην τινὰ	1	The phrase a certain introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2351	16:16	ymt9			πνεῦμα Πύθωνα	1	An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.
2352	16:17	tni9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2353	16:18	lj79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2354	16:18	qi1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, name stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2355	16:18	u4z8			ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately”
2356	16:19	m1y7			οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl”
2357	16:19	r1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδόντες & οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν	1	It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2358	16:19	bws7			εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν	1	The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square”
2359	16:19	hf82			ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας	1	Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”
2360	16:20	d2rg			προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges”
2361	16:20	wa94			τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	These magistrates were rulers or judges.
2362	16:20	dkz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here the word our refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2363	16:21	gna6			παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do”
2364	16:22	r1gr			αὐτῶν & περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον	1	Here the words their and them refer to Paul and Silas.
2365	16:22	at6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2366	16:23	dsr3			πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods”
2367	16:23	y4mc			παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς	1	Alternate translation: “having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape”
2368	16:23	zkp7			δεσμοφύλακι	1	A jailer was a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison.
2369	16:24	a79x			ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν	1	Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command”
2370	16:24	rl8c			τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον	1	Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks”
2371	16:24	jug6			ξύλον	1	The stocks was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving.
2372	16:26	q7z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2373	16:26	m4ye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2374	16:26	s6mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2375	16:26	p393		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2376	16:27	hr9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔξυπνος & γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2377	16:27	cwt5			ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν	1	The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself”
2378	16:28	ljy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	Here the word we refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2379	16:29	pe66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἰτήσας & φῶτα	1	The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2380	16:29	h5ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	φῶτα	1	The word lights stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2381	16:29	r6is			εἰσεπήδησεν	1	Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail”
2382	16:29	bb6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ	1	The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2383	16:30	a3h6			προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω	1	Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail”
2384	16:30	u132		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2385	16:31	br4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2386	16:31	w8ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκός σου	1	Here, your household refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2387	16:32	pq5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2388	16:33	r3la		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2389	16:35	lb4z			δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in Acts 16:16.
2390	16:35	vev9			ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους	1	Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave”
2391	16:36	k3i6			ἐξελθόντες	1	Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail”
2392	16:37	v4yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς	1	The word us refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2393	16:37	b4jm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς	1	Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2394	16:37	b7cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ	1	Here They refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2395	16:37	wc37			ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν	1	Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail”
2396	16:37	qq1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ	1	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2397	16:37	jr2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ	1	Here, themselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2398	16:38	ym2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2399	16:40	q59h			εἰσῆλθον & ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν	1	Here the word they refers to Paul and Silas. The word them refers to the believers in Philippi.
2400	16:40	y14i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2401	16:40	t1pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν	1	Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2402	16:40	ylk9			τὴν Λυδίαν	1	Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia”
2403	16:40	ntc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἰδόντες & τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Here, the brothers refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2404	17:intro	gj4c				0	Acts 17 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Misunderstandings about the Messiah The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]]) The religion of Athens Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
2405	17:1	e4w5			δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.
2406	17:1	b7np			διοδεύσαντες	1	Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through”
2407	17:1	q9x4			ἦλθον	1	Here the word they refers to Paul and Silas. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” Compare Acts 16:40.
2408	17:1	kll1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν	1	Amphipolis and Apollonia are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2409	17:1	yj66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην	1	Here, came can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2410	17:2	vbf2			κατὰ & τὸ εἰωθὸς	1	Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was”
2411	17:2	bt5e			ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία	1	Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks”
2412	17:2	wp3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν	1	Paul explained what the Scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2413	17:2	qf4t			διελέξατο αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them”
2414	17:3	ir9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2415	17:3	he78			ἔδει	1	Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for”
2416	17:3	ipb2			ἀναστῆναι	1	Alternate translation: “to come back to life”
2417	17:3	b9qi			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2418	17:4	es2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2419	17:4	nyp2			προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ	1	Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul”
2420	17:4	t21z			σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	This refers to Greeks who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision.
2421	17:4	ye8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	γυναικῶν & τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι	1	Here, not a few is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2422	17:5	nuh6			ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν & ἐζήτουν	1	Here the word they refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.
2423	17:5	uj43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζηλώσαντες	1	The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2424	17:5	vev6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζηλώσαντες	1	It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2425	17:5	btw6			προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	Here, having taken does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.
2426	17:5	lc6g			ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	The word men here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men”
2427	17:5	ie1f			τῶν ἀγοραίων	1	The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square”
2428	17:5	t3bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here, the city stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2429	17:5	s3uv			ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	This phrase probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house”
2430	17:5	ks2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάσονος	1	Jason is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2431	17:5	abcu			αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas”
2432	17:5	pp7k			εἰς τὸν δῆμον	1	This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob.
2433	17:6	i79p			τινας ἀδελφοὺς	1	Here, brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers”
2434	17:6	e44z			ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας	1	Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials”
2435	17:6	g7xj			οἱ & οὗτοι	1	The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns Those and they to refer to Paul and Silas.
2436	17:6	c2av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1	This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2437	17:6	x90b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1	The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2438	17:7	hlc9			ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες	1	This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message.
2439	17:8	th2f			ἐτάραξαν	1	Alternate translation: “were worried”
2440	17:9	ya44			λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν	1	Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior.
2441	17:9	bj48			τῶν λοιπῶν	1	The words the rest of them refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.
2442	17:9	aru6			ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	Alternate translation: “the officials let Jason and the other believers go”
2443	17:10	na8h			General Information:	0	General Information: Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.
2444	17:10	qy5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	1	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2445	17:11	k2st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2446	17:11	gu6s			οὗτοι & ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι	1	These open-minded people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen”
2447	17:11	hle3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον	1	Here, word refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2448	17:11	uh8a			μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας	1	These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture.
2449	17:11	lzm3			καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς	1	Alternate translation: “carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day”
2450	17:11	g8an			ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως	1	Alternate translation: “the things Paul said were true”
2451	17:12	abcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι	1	Here, not a few is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2452	17:13	asb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες	1	This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2453	17:13	wjq3			ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset”
2454	17:14	ael8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2455	17:14	zw1c			πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν	1	From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast”
2456	17:15	tjh5			καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον	1	Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul”
2457	17:15	vn8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀθηνῶν	1	Athens is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2458	17:15	gs1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον	1	This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2459	17:16	y9cr			δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
2460	17:16	wk63			ἐν & ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου	1	This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.
2461	17:16	we78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here, his spirit stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2462	17:16	s011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2463	17:17	q8px			διελέγετο	1	This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed”
2464	17:17	jkj8			τοῖς σεβομένοις	1	This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws.
2465	17:17	ec14			ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ	1	The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square”
2466	17:18	ru6a			αὐτῷ & δοκεῖ & εὐηγγελίζετο	1	Here the words him, He, and he refer to Paul.
2467	17:18	l7le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2468	17:18	f976		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	These Stoic philosophers believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2469	17:18	dnj8			τινες ἔλεγον	1	Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said”
2470	17:18	g4bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν?	1	The word babbler was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2471	17:18	k2ps			οἱ δέ	1	Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said”
2472	17:18	l41t			δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι	1	Alternate translation: “He seems to be teaching a philosophy”
2473	17:18	sx9t			ξένων δαιμονίων	1	That is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.
2474	17:19	mv8c			ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον	1	This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.
2475	17:19	b56g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	The Areopagus was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2476	17:19	ze7e			τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον & λέγοντες	1	Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul”
2477	17:19	unc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	The Areopagus is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2478	17:20	lay8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2479	17:20	fs5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	βουλόμεθα	1	Here the word we refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2480	17:20	us7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	Here, ears refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2481	17:21	dn1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι	1	The word all is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2482	17:21	d8yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀθηναῖοι	1	Here, the Athenians are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2483	17:21	sk5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν	1	Here, time is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2484	17:21	ij4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν	1	The phrase spent their time in nothing is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2485	17:21	wr1r			λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον	1	Alternate translation: “discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them”
2486	17:22	zq3y			ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ	1	Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.
2487	17:22	ja1k			κατὰ πάντα & δεισιδαιμονεστέρους	1	Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.
2488	17:23	gn1j			διερχόμενος γὰρ	1	Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along”
2489	17:23	cem7			ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ	1	This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.
2490	17:24	m1jm			τὸν κόσμον	1	In the most general sense, the world refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.
2491	17:24	rqk9			οὗτος & ὑπάρχων Κύριος	1	Here, he is referring to the unknown god mentioned in Acts 17:23 that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord”
2492	17:24	f2mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς	1	The words heaven and earth are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2493	17:24	ju4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	Here, hands stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2494	17:25	e3dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται	1	Here, served has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2495	17:25	yq68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων	1	Here, hands stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2496	17:25	sj89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς διδοὺς	1	The word himself is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2497	17:26	r3lt			ἐποίησέν & προστεταγμένους & αὐτῶν	1	Here the word he refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word their refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth.
2498	17:26	p1e4			ἑνὸς	1	This refers to Adam, the first person God created.
2499	17:26	js4p			ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν	1	You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”
2500	17:27	jae5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	Here, to seek God represents desiring to know him, and feel around for him and find him represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2501	17:27	p8hk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα	1	Paul uses the negative not far to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2502	17:27	onm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	In using the word us, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2503	17:28	tkd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	General Information:	0	General Information: Here the words him and his refer to God (Acts 17:24). When Paul says we here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2504	17:28	cbd9			ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ	1	Alternate translation: “Because of him”
2505	17:29	k9ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2506	17:29	czi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ θεῖον	1	Here, divine being refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2507	17:29	q4q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2508	17:30	suh6			οὖν	1	Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
2509	17:30	iva4			τοὺς & χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς	1	Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance”
2510	17:30	h8uy			χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας	1	This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.
2511	17:30	qim5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας	1	Here, all men refers to all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2512	17:31	htp7			ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν	1	Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness”
2513	17:31	jt3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	Here, world refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2514	17:31	l61p			πίστιν παρασχὼν	1	Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man”
2515	17:31	ulr4			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2516	17:32	tc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀκουσόμεθά	1	Here the word We refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2517	17:32	c4sm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2518	17:32	nb26			δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.
2519	17:32	jlm5			ἀκούσαντες	1	These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul.
2520	17:32	sn6j			οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον	1	These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
2521	17:34	psh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης	1	Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2522	17:34	hsz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δάμαρις	1	Damaris is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2523	18:intro	rky6				0	Acts 18 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The baptism of John Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
2524	18:1	qa9b			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth.
2525	18:1	fky7			μετὰ ταῦτα	1	Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens”
2526	18:1	abcw			χωρισθεὶς	1	Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed”
2527	18:1	h2si			τῶν Ἀθηνῶν	1	Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 17:15.
2528	18:2	d9zx			καὶ εὑρών	1	This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found.
2529	18:2	hm16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν	1	Here the phrase a certain indicates Luke is introducing Aquilla as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2530	18:2	jat1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης	1	Verses 2 and 3 give background information about Aquila and Priscilla. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2531	18:2	y97p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει	1	Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2532	18:2	q4va			προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα	1	This probably happened sometime in the past year.
2533	18:2	n631		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Ἰταλίας & τῆς Ῥώμης	1	Italy is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2534	18:2	n95f			τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον	1	Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in Acts 11:28.
2535	18:3	q259			τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι	1	Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did”
2536	18:4	h3az			διελέγετο δὲ	1	This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed”
2537	18:4	r2gp			ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας	1	This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.”
2538	18:5	r56h			General Information:	0	General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
2539	18:6	ncx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια	1	This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2540	18:6	z12a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Here, blood stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2541	18:6	pacx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Here, head refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2542	18:7	cd3u			εἰσῆλθεν	1	Here the word he refers to Paul.
2543	18:7	vs6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τιτίου Ἰούστου	1	Titius Justus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2544	18:7	v8xg			σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.
2545	18:8	lj2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κρίσπος	1	Crispus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2546	18:8	kkk9			ἀρχισυνάγωγος	1	The leader of the synagogue was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher.
2547	18:8	uaq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, house refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2548	18:8	t3np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2549	18:9	ws7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2550	18:9	zg8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2551	18:9	a529		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2552	18:10	a8lq			λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me”
2553	18:11	mqx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2554	18:11	a18w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, word of God is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2555	18:12	f41k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Ἀχαΐας	1	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2556	18:12	b5bf			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.
2557	18:12	se8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαλλίωνος	1	Gallio is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2558	18:12	j762		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here, the Jews stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2559	18:12	lp79			κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	Alternate translation: “came together against” or “joined together to attack”
2560	18:12	u36c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα	1	The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2561	18:14	d13b			ὁ Γαλλίων	1	Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province.
2562	18:15	y6mt			νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here, law refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time.
2563	18:15	khr5			κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι	1	Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters”
2564	18:16	d6nh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος	1	Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2565	18:17	yf81			ἐπιλαβόμενοι & πάντες	1	Here the word they probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat (Acts 18:12).
2566	18:17	cyk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐπιλαβόμενοι & πάντες	1	This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2567	18:17	mj77			ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος	1	This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court.
2568	18:17	x9w5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον	1	Sosthenes was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2569	18:17	z9fv			ἔτυπτον	1	Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him”
2570	18:18	x25w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς & εἶχεν	1	Here the words He and he refer to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2571	18:18	ura9			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.”
2572	18:18	et8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος	1	The word brothers refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2573	18:18	v5kl			ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας	1	Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him.
2574	18:18	kq6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a vow. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2575	18:19	abcx			κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν	1	Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla”
2576	18:19	st93			διελέξατο	1	Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with”
2577	18:20	u44s			ἐρωτώντων	1	Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus.
2578	18:21	iz1u			ἀποταξάμενος	1	Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them”
2579	18:22	p364			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey.
2580	18:22	gyy4			κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	The word landed is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea”
2581	18:22	r26z			ἀναβὰς	1	He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase gone up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
2582	18:22	q9j6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Here, church refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2583	18:22	n3rh			κατέβη	1	The phrase went down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
2584	18:23	h65j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ	1	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2585	18:23	pww5			ἐξῆλθεν	1	Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left”
2586	18:23	pr6u			Φρυγίαν	1	Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
2587	18:24	a7p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Ἀπολλῶς	1	Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2588	18:24	xqy7			δέ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line.
2589	18:24	n2b4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος & τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι	1	The phrase a certain indicates that Luke is introducing Apollos as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2590	18:24	di14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει	1	Alexandria was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2591	18:24	t4zi			ἀνὴρ λόγιος	1	Alternate translation: “a good speaker”
2592	18:24	bh25			δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς	1	He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly”
2593	18:25	z7a8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2594	18:25	ift8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι	1	Here, spirit refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2595	18:25	lr1h			τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”
2596	18:26	muc2			Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila.
2597	18:26	ga6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2598	18:26	k1lb			ἀκριβέστερον	1	Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully”
2599	18:27	c2sq			αὐτοῦ & προτρεψάμενοι & αὐτόν & ὃς & συνεβάλετο πολὺ	1	Here the he words he and him refer to Apollos (Acts 18:24).
2600	18:27	ll36			διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	The phrase pass over is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia”
2601	18:27	pql7			τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
2602	18:27	v2i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	The word brothers here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2603	18:27	i5ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	You can make explicit that the brothers are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2604	18:27	q5f2			ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς	1	Alternate translation: “and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia”
2605	18:27	f99p			τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος	1	Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus”
2606	18:28	l2zt			εὐτόνως & τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong”
2607	19:intro	g38y				0	Acts 19 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Baptism John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus. Temple of Diana The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
2608	19:1	lp23			ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2609	19:1	wu6p			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus.
2610	19:1	rhv1			Παῦλον διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, κατελθεῖν εἰς Ἔφεσον	1	The upper parts was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea.
2611	19:1	ati9			διελθόντα	1	Alternate translation: “traveled through”
2612	19:2	wqi4			εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε	1	This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.
2613	19:2	nvn4			οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν	1	Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit”
2614	19:3	mrm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2615	19:3	jzp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα	1	You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2616	19:4	r46y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2617	19:4	pv7t			τὸν ἐρχόμενον	1	Here, the one refers to Jesus.
2618	19:4	q5fh			τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν	1	This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.
2619	19:5	k9st			ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	Here, they refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul (Acts 19:1),
2620	19:5	ueh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2621	19:5	g2dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2622	19:6	gk8l			ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας	1	He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed”
2623	19:6	j4n8			ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον	1	Unlike in Acts 2:3-4, there are no details of who understood their messages.
2624	19:7	e7kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα	1	This tells how many men were baptized. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2625	19:8	qv8z			εἰσελθὼν & εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς	1	Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly”
2626	19:8	yky2			διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων	1	Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching”
2627	19:8	v8et		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2628	19:9	mq1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν	1	To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming hardened and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2629	19:9	n6ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους	1	What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase the Way seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and Acts 9:2)
2630	19:9	ts8d			κακολογοῦντες	1	Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about”
2631	19:9	xsm6			ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου	1	Alternate translation: “in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people”
2632	19:9	den4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τυράννου	1	Tyrannus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2633	19:10	cw5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here, all is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2634	19:10	kj12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2635	19:11	fa6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου	1	Here, hands stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2636	19:11	abcy			οὐ τὰς τυχούσας	1	Alternate translation: “unusual”
2637	19:12	cb6w			αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους & ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	Here the words their and them refer to those who were sick.
2638	19:12	m3kl			καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul”
2639	19:12	vc1v			καὶ & ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια	1	This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.
2640	19:12	aks4			σουδάρια	1	The handkerchiefs were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face.
2641	19:12	xs31			σιμικίνθια	1	The aprons were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of the wearers.
2642	19:12	kw9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2643	19:12	nl3a			ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους	1	Alternate translation: “those who were sick became healthy”
2644	19:13	he2x			General Information:	0	General Information: This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.
2645	19:13	fgq4			ἐξορκιστῶν	1	These exorcists were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.
2646	19:13	s12u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2647	19:13	d59p			τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει	1	Jesus was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.
2648	19:13	vqt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	This phrase stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2649	19:14	cb8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σκευᾶ	1	Sceva is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2650	19:15	i4a2			τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι	1	Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul”
2651	19:15	nsl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ?	1	The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2652	19:16	ty4x			ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν	1	This means that the evil spirit caused the man whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.
2653	19:16	lu7u			αὐτοὺς	1	Here, them refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in Acts 19:13.
2654	19:16	b8cb			γυμνοὺς & ἐκφυγεῖν	1	The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.
2655	19:17	j85h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2656	19:17	j2hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα	1	Here, the name stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2657	19:19	z9rj			συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους	1	The word books refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books”
2658	19:19	m6nf			ἐνώπιον πάντων	1	Alternate translation: “in front of everyone”
2659	19:19	upz3			τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν	1	Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”
2660	19:19	u9pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	μυριάδας πέντε	1	Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2661	19:19	bcv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου	1	Each of the pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2662	19:20	tj8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2663	19:20	es71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν	1	Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2664	19:21	k1j1			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
2665	19:21	de4f			δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
2666	19:21	q18b			ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα & ὁ Παῦλος	1	Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he”
2667	19:21	fgq5			ἔθετο & ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι	1	This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.
2668	19:21	brb7			Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
2669	19:21	rdz4			δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome”
2670	19:22	cy6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἔραστον	1	Erastus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2671	19:22	k35j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2672	19:22	uy9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν	1	Here, himself is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2673	19:23	l7gz			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.
2674	19:23	nb3p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἐγένετο & τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	Luke uses the negative no small to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in Acts 12:18 Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2675	19:23	rwf2			τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in Acts 9:1.
2676	19:24	y5ae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Δημήτριος & τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1	This verse introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2677	19:24	opb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δημήτριος	1	Demetrius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2678	19:24	cg16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Δημήτριος & τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος	1	The use of the words a certain introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2679	19:24	nwt7			ἀργυροκόπος	1	A silversmith is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.
2680	19:24	p58m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	παρείχετο & οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν	1	Luke uses the negative not a little to say that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2681	19:25	kuz6			τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας	1	An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work”
2682	19:26	rm6w			θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι	1	Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that”
2683	19:26	rx32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον	1	Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2684	19:26	z7e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι	1	Here the word hands can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2685	19:27	r1w2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2686	19:27	j3bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2687	19:27	bqt4			μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς	1	Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her.
2688	19:27	hz7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2689	19:27	aq5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	Here the words Asia and the world refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2690	19:28	t4lm			ἔκραζον	1	Here they refers to the craftsmen who made the idols (Acts 19:24-25).
2691	19:28	uc5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ	1	This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, anger is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2692	19:28	lcx8			ἔκραζον	1	Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly”
2693	19:28	ii1u			General Information:	0	General Information: Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia.
2694	19:29	t7xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	Here, city refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2695	19:29	u42d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, confusion is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2696	19:29	nt7y			ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	This was a mob or near riot situation.
2697	19:29	ej3q			εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.
2698	19:29	hjc8			Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον Μακεδόνας, συνεκδήμους Παύλου	1	These were men who had been with Paul.
2699	19:29	d6r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γάϊον & Ἀρίσταρχον	1	Gaius and Aristarchus are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2700	19:31	z7ww			τὸ θέατρον	1	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated theater in Acts 19:29.
2701	19:33	jr85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλέξανδρον	1	Alexander is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2702	19:33	j1mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα	1	You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2703	19:33	tlq7			ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.”
2704	19:34	u1hp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων	1	The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2705	19:35	pu96			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.
2706	19:35	sy9m			ὁ γραμματεὺς	1	This town clerk was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town.
2707	19:35	sd3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?	1	The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2708	19:35	k8dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	The town clerk uses not to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2709	19:35	hiw3			νεωκόρον & τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος	1	The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis.
2710	19:35	afd1			τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).
2711	19:36	r8cf			ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων	1	Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true”
2712	19:36	xj2n			μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν	1	Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it”
2713	19:36	s67q			προπετὲς	1	To be rash is to act without careful thought.
2714	19:37	s8a9			τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους	1	The words these men refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29).
2715	19:38	qd4s			οὖν	1	The town clerk had said in Acts 19:37 that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
2716	19:38	zkx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον	1	Here having a word against someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2717	19:38	szf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀνθύπατοί	1	The proconsuls were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2718	19:38	g8tp			ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις	1	This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another”
2719	19:39	hxh3			εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε	1	Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss”
2720	19:39	wga5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2721	19:39	et5j			τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	This regular assembly refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.
2722	19:40	sds7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2723	20:intro	u91c				0	Acts 20 General Notes Structure and formatting In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem. Special concepts in this chapter Race Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]]) “Compelled by the Spirit” Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
2724	20:1	cwq7			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.
2725	20:1	y5cq			μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον	1	Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot”
2726	20:1	hr32			ἀσπασάμενος	1	Alternate translation: “and he said goodbye”
2727	20:2	edb8			παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ	1	Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers”
2728	20:3	yxj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς	1	This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2729	20:3	cit9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2730	20:3	ah5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here, the Jews refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2731	20:3	m7na			μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1	Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
2732	20:4	c9et			συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “And traveling with him”
2733	20:4	dw6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σώπατρος & Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος	1	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2734	20:4	w4n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βεροιαῖος & Θεσσαλονικέων & Δερβαῖος & Ἀσιανοὶ	1	These are names of places. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2735	20:4	w8j6			Σώπατρος Πύρρου & Ἀρίσταρχος & Σεκοῦνδος & Γάϊος & Τιμόθεος & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος	1	These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Acts 19:29.
2736	20:5	y35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προσελθόντες & ἡμᾶς	1	All instances of us in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2737	20:5	kv8t			οὗτοι & προσελθόντες	1	Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us”
2738	20:5	itz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τρῳάδι	1	Troas is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2739	20:6	vmj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἤλθομεν & διετρίψαμεν	1	All instances of we in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2740	20:6	l5dr			τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in Acts 12:3.
2741	20:7	dnt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 20:4-6)
2742	20:7	mbr8			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.
2743	20:7	zff8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2744	20:7	j888			παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον	1	Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak”
2745	20:8	ak8z			ὑπερῴῳ	1	This upper room may have been the third floor of the house.
2746	20:9	v5q7			ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος	1	This window was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it.
2747	20:9	ju64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Εὔτυχος	1	Eutychus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2748	20:9	tsp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ	1	This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2749	20:9	abcz			κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	The young man fell asleep, not Paul.
2750	20:9	jp89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός	1	When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2751	20:9	kh3h			τριστέγου	1	The third story refers to a level two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.”
2752	20:11	av7m			ἀναβὰς & τε ὁμιλήσας & ἐξῆλθεν	1	Here all occurrences of the word he refer to Paul.
2753	20:11	lih8			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.
2754	20:11	w5w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον	1	Bread was a common food during meals. Here, broken bread probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2755	20:11	t88c			οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν	1	Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away”
2756	20:12	jkj5			τὸν παῖδα	1	Here, the boy refers to Eutychus (Acts 20:9). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave.
2757	20:12	abx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	Luke uses the negative not moderately to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2758	20:13	dja7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & μέλλοντες	1	Here the word we refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2759	20:13	w4ew		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & προελθόντες	1	The word we here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2760	20:13	q4yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἆσσον	1	Assos is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2761	20:13	nq2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	1	Here, himself is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2762	20:13	p8y7			πεζεύειν	1	Alternate translation: “to walk”
2763	20:14	ju8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μιτυλήνην	1	Mitylene is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2764	20:15	ll2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κατηντήσαμεν & παρεβάλομεν & ἤλθομεν	1	Here the word we refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2765	20:15	ulk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Χίου	1	Chios is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2766	20:15	jyr7			παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον	1	Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos”
2767	20:15	b6c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σάμον	1	Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2768	20:15	s7g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μίλητον	1	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2769	20:16	p272		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2770	20:16	p61e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι	1	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2771	20:17	nw52			μετεκαλέσατο	1	Here the word he refers to Paul.
2772	20:17	v9al			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
2773	20:17	l9aj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Μιλήτου	1	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in Acts 20:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2774	20:18	b6li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	Here, yourselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2775	20:18	vw6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	Here, foot stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2776	20:19	wh5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δακρύων	1	Here tears stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2777	20:19	e6k7			πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word trials, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
2778	20:19	y5iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here, the Jews does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2779	20:20	nu7h			ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you”
2780	20:20	kut9			κατ’ οἴκους	1	Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone’s home”
2781	20:21	w7mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and faith, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2782	20:21	x552		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The word our refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2783	20:22	ty3b			ἐγὼ	1	Here the word I refers to Paul.
2784	20:22	vam4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2785	20:22	a9j1			τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς	1	Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem”
2786	20:23	q3ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν	1	Here, chains refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2787	20:24	w8d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	This speaks about Paul’s race and ministry as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2788	20:24	ga6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν	1	Here, race and ministry mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2789	20:24	m5gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου	1	Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a race. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2790	20:24	hg3l			διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace”
2791	20:25	kj9c			καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα	1	Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know”
2792	20:25	z4ng			ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι & ὑμεῖς πάντες	1	Alternate translation: “I know that all of you”
2793	20:25	aur9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν	1	Here, kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2794	20:25	cq45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου	1	The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2795	20:26	e546		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	Here, blood stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2796	20:26	v5el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντων	1	Here all refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2797	20:27	qa9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν	1	Paul uses the negative not hold back to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2798	20:28	u52d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Believers are likened to a flock of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a shepherd would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2799	20:28	cx69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	The shedding of the blood of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2800	20:28	hjh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	Here, blood stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2801	20:29	ka6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were wolves that eat the sheep of the flock. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2802	20:30	ftf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2803	20:31	q2nl			γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες	1	Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”
2804	20:31	ll64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	Christian leaders being alert about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2805	20:31	pvt6			μνημονεύοντες ὅτι	1	Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that”
2806	20:31	rt1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν	1	Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2807	20:31	hs1m			οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν	1	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not stop, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn”
2808	20:31	rvh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	Here, tears refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2809	20:32	ylm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2810	20:32	vnb2			παρατίθεμαι	1	To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something.
2811	20:32	s7rf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι	1	A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2812	20:32	zvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	This speaks about the word of his grace as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2813	20:32	x5jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2814	20:33	yw8a			ἀργυρίου & οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα	1	Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver”
2815	20:33	ipq5			ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς	1	Here, clothing is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.
2816	20:34	f5a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε	1	The word yourselves is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2817	20:34	ja5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	The word hands here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2818	20:35	wn8j			κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need”
2819	20:35	p3n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	You can state the nominal adjective weak as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2820	20:35	dpu1			ἀσθενούντων	1	Alternate translation: “sick”
2821	20:35	ps2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, words refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2822	20:35	e396			μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν	1	This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.
2823	20:36	q6bs			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.
2824	20:36	u3uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ & προσηύξατο	1	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2825	20:37	pb4r			ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου	1	Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him”
2826	20:37	sze4			κατεφίλουν αὐτόν	1	To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.
2827	20:38	bs3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2828	21:intro	gh1j				0	Acts 21 General Notes Structure and formatting Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews. The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does. Special concepts in this chapter “They are all determined to keep the law” The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that. Nazarite vow The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23). Gentiles in the temple The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
2829	21:1	i6f8			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.
2830	21:1	s3h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἤλθομεν	1	Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2831	21:1	zz5h			εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ	1	Alternate translation: “we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos”
2832	21:1	e5y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κῶ	1	Cos is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2833	21:1	p6ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥόδον	1	Rhodes is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2834	21:1	x7kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάταρα	1	Patara is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2835	21:2	nz9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην	1	Here, a ship crossing over stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “And when we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2836	21:2	vbd3			πλοῖον διαπερῶν	1	Here, crossing does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going”
2837	21:3	er3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐπλέομεν	1	Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2838	21:3	vkr2			καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον	1	The left is the “port” side of a boat. Alternate translation: “passed the island on our left”
2839	21:3	hwx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	Here, ship stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2840	21:4	y35m			οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Alternate translation: “These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them, for him”
2841	21:5	fe1u			πάντων	1	Here the word they refers to the believers from Tyre.
2842	21:5	a5wj			ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	Alternate translation: “when we had finished taking supplies onto the ship”
2843	21:5	q8xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι	1	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2844	21:6	ja1x			ἀπησπασάμεθα ἀλλήλους	1	Alternate translation: “we said goodbye to one another”
2845	21:7	hy6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & κατηντήσαμεν & ἐμείναμεν	1	Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2846	21:7	z4nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πτολεμαΐδα	1	Ptolemais was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemais is modern day Acre, Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2847	21:7	ff1s			τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”
2848	21:8	kt6u			Καισάρειαν	1	Connecting Statement: This begins Paul’s time in Caesarea.
2849	21:8	ay52			ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1	Here, the seven refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in Acts 6:5.
2850	21:8	vi48			εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	An evangelist is a person who tells people the good news about Jesus.
2851	21:9	rcf4			τούτῳ	1	Alternate translation: “Philip”
2852	21:9	cv8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2853	21:9	r1i1			θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι	1	Alternate translation: “four virgin daughters who regularly receive and pass along messages from God”
2854	21:10	fe6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐπιμενόντων	1	Here the word we refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2855	21:10	n3i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	This introduces Agabus as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2856	21:10	f9cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἅγαβος	1	Agabus was a man from Judea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2857	21:11	n2r0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Here the word us refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2858	21:11	i8t2			ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου	1	Alternate translation: “removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist”
2859	21:11	nq2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν.	1	This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2860	21:11	i8u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2861	21:11	zvw8			παραδώσουσιν	1	Alternate translation: “they will deliver him”
2862	21:11	s92d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	The word hands here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2863	21:11	b59g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐθνῶν	1	This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2864	21:12	fvh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμεῖς	1	Here the word we refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2865	21:13	uwt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν?	1	Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2866	21:13	bj76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2867	21:13	k34w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here, heart stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2868	21:13	p5e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2869	21:13	q35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, name refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2870	21:14	hwc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “we were unable to persuade Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2871	21:14	zl98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μὴ πειθομένου	1	You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: “would not be persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2872	21:14	as1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “May everything happen as the Lord has planned it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2873	21:15	p5fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀνεβαίνομεν	1	Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2874	21:16	k9kr			παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	The disciples from Caesarea knew Mnason and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
2875	21:16	zd9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μνάσωνί & Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2876	21:16	c7r2			τινι & ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
2877	21:17	wz34			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.
2878	21:17	d3gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοί	1	Here, the brothers refers to the believers in Jerusalem whether male or female. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers welcomed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2879	21:19	bx9e			ἐξηγεῖτο καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον	1	Alternate translation: “he gave a detailed account of everything”
2880	21:20	zks9			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.
2881	21:20	a1hk			οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν τε αὐτῷ	1	Here each instance of the word they refers to James and the elders. The word him refers to Paul.
2882	21:20	xki4			ἀδελφέ	1	Here, brother means “fellow believer.”
2883	21:20	c5pu			ὑπάρχουσιν	1	The word they refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.
2884	21:21	pyg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν δὲ περὶ σοῦ, ὅτι ἀποστασίαν διδάσκεις ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας Ἰουδαίους, λέγων μὴ περιτέμνειν αὐτοὺς τὰ τέκνα, μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of Moses. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God’s true message. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2885	21:21	e5s4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηχήθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told the Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2886	21:21	sdl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	Here, Moses stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “rebellion against the Law of Moses” or “to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2887	21:21	knt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	To obey the customs is spoken of as if the customs were a path that people could walk along. Alternate translation: “and not to obey the customs” or “and not to practice the customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2888	21:21	u56t			τοῖς ἔθεσιν	1	Alternate translation: “do the things that Jews normally do”
2889	21:23	b28b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1	Here the word we refers to James and the elders (Acts 21:18). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2890	21:23	b22r			ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. Alternate translation: “four men who have made a promise to God”
2891	21:24	km4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2892	21:24	c3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς	1	The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. Alternate translation: “pay for what they will need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2893	21:24	abq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν	1	This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2894	21:24	nu9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2895	21:24	sv6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	στοιχεῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον	1	This speaks of obeying the law as if the law were a path and people can walk along it. Alternate translation: “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2896	21:25	c4kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Here the word we refers to James and the elders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2897	21:25	a35u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν	1	All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to idols, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in Acts 15:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2898	21:25	bpb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2899	21:25	wjd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πνικτὸν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2900	21:25	nu0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνικτὸν	1	If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can state explicitly the assumed information that what was strangled were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2901	21:26	cr14			παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας	1	These are the four men who had made a vow.
2902	21:26	s8z9			σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς	1	Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.
2903	21:26	xu9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2904	21:26	pvy3			τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	This is a separate purification process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.
2905	21:26	gc23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη & ἡ προσφορά	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until they presented the animals for an offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2906	21:27	p4gi			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: This begins the story of Paul’s arrest.
2907	21:27	j9zm			αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι	1	These are the seven days for purification.
2908	21:27	k4l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Paul was not in the temple itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2909	21:27	u942		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον	1	Inciting people to become very angry at Paul is spoken of as if they stirred up the crowd’s emotions. Alternate translation: “caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2910	21:27	mks6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	Here, laid their hands on means to “seize” or to “grab.” See how you translated laid hands on in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “seized Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2911	21:28	sfg3			τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου	1	Alternate translation: “the people of Israel, and the law of Moses, and the temple”
2912	21:28	jc9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2913	21:29	t2z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος	1	This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2914	21:29	h1uu			Τρόφιμον	1	Trophimus was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in Acts 20:4.
2915	21:30	st3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	The word city represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And the people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2916	21:30	upl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	The word whole here is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2917	21:30	x2sx			ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου	1	Alternate translation: “having seized Paul” or “after they grabbed Paul”
2918	21:30	xd6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. Alternate translation: “the temple doors were immediately shut to protect the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2919	21:30	mmaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2920	21:31	d6vt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	Here, report refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2921	21:31	hu5r			ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	The phrase came up to is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.
2922	21:31	p85a			τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	A Roman commander was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2923	21:31	u65r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The word Jerusalem here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2924	21:31	zgas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The word all is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2925	21:32	j81t			κατέδραμεν	1	The word he refers to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in Acts 21:31.
2926	21:32	dgz5			κατέδραμεν	1	From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court.
2927	21:32	e4rj			τὸν χιλίαρχον	1	The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2928	21:33	w28u			ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “took hold of Paul” or “arrested Paul”
2929	21:33	zi4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2930	21:33	xd9w			ἁλύσεσι δυσί	1	This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.
2931	21:33	y6zw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς	1	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “He asked, ‘Who is this man? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2932	21:33	fi22			ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη	1	The commander is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.
2933	21:34	k35e			αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1	The first instance of he refers to the commander, and the second he refers to Paul.
2934	21:34	qcc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2935	21:34	w2qj			εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court.
2936	21:35	h9n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅτε δὲ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, συνέβη βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers had to carry him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2937	21:36	kax6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	αἶρε αὐτόν	1	The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” or “Kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2938	21:37	j9xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2939	21:37	qp63			τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2940	21:37	inl1			τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	The commander was a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers.
2941	21:37	p5cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις?	1	The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2942	21:38	xx2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?	1	The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. This could mean: (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2943	21:38	nxs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος	1	Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2944	21:38	tqh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας	1	Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2945	21:38	p2ym			τῶν σικαρίων	1	This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans.
2946	21:39	ys84			δέομαι & σου	1	Alternate translation: “I beg you” or “I plead with you”
2947	21:39	a139			ἐπίτρεψόν μοι	1	Alternate translation: “please allow me” or “please permit me”
2948	21:40	qp2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word permission, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2949	21:40	a4y2			ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν	1	The word steps here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.
2950	21:40	rk1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with his hand. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2951	21:40	xj6i			πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης	1	Alternate translation: “And when the people were completely silent”
2952	22:intro	gq5g				0	Acts 22 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26) Special concepts in this chapter “In the Hebrew language” Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
2953	22:1	a8ir			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
2954	22:1	xe46			ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.
2955	22:1	pe8t			ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	Alternate translation: “I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”
2956	22:2	kq95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	General Information:	0	General Information: This verse gives background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2957	22:2	b4sk			τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ	1	The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
2958	22:3	g311		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2959	22:3	d4dx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	Here, feet stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2960	22:3	b1dq			Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in Acts 5:34.
2961	22:3	iz4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “the instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2962	22:3	lqk7			τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of our ancestors”
2963	22:3	a8d6			ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God”
2964	22:3	dbl4			καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον	1	Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today”
2965	22:4	jy3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα	1	Here, this Way represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2966	22:4	bk4c			ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	The term this Way was used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated the Way in Acts 9:2.
2967	22:4	dr8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word death, you could express the same idea with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2968	22:4	zd2r			δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας	1	Alternate translation: “tying up both men and women and taking them to prison”
2969	22:5	v2km			μαρτυρεῖ	1	Alternate translation: “can testify” or “can tell you”
2970	22:5	i45u			παρ’ ὧν καὶ ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος	1	Alternate translation: “who also gave me letters”
2971	22:5	in72			πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, εἰς Δαμασκὸν	1	Here, brothers refers to “fellow Jews.”
2972	22:5	y82b			ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Alternate translation: “to bind with chains those of the Way and bring them back to Jerusalem”
2973	22:5	ht9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that they may receive punishment” or “in order that the Jewish authorities could punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2974	22:6	pe9s			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.
2975	22:6	w4l7			ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2976	22:7	d6nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone say to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2977	22:9	h95h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι	1	Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2978	22:10	a91a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2979	22:11	n1kb			οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου	1	Alternate translation: “I was left blind because of that light’s brightness”
2980	22:11	qyf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2981	22:11	n2n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι	1	Here, hands stands for those leading Paul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2982	22:12	a17q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἁνανίας & τις	1	The words a certain Ananias are used to introduce Ananias as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2983	22:12	h5bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3, you may translate it the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2984	22:12	z1g3			ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1	Ananias was very serious about following God’s law.
2985	22:12	e7uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having a good reputation among all the Jews who lived there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2986	22:13	un4g			Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Here, brother is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: “Saul, my friend”
2987	22:13	x3kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνάβλεψον	1	This phrase is an idiom that means “receive your sight.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2988	22:13	se47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: “at that instant” or “instantly” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2989	22:13	x4s0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κἀγὼ & ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν	1	This phrase is an idiom that means he received his sight. Alternate translation: “And … I was able to see him” or “And … I saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2990	22:14	v2i7			ὁ & εἶπεν	1	The wordhe refers to Ananias (Acts 22:12).
2991	22:14	k3ck			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.
2992	22:14	k417			τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “what God is planning and will cause to happen”
2993	22:14	dg8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Both voice and mouth refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2994	22:15	i5q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους	1	Here, men means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2995	22:16	bhg9			νῦν	1	Here, now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2996	22:16	mmx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις?	1	This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2997	22:16	lt2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βάπτισαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2998	22:16	zr5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου	1	As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2999	22:16	g5dq			ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Here, name refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord”
3000	22:17	znq6			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.
3001	22:17	its2			ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
3002	22:17	yr9l			γενέσθαι με ἐν ἐκστάσει	1	Alternate translation: “I had a vision” or “God gave me a vision”
3003	22:18	jy2c			ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι	1	Alternate translation: “I saw Jesus as he said to me”
3004	22:18	qul6			οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me”
3005	22:19	q5cl			αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	Here the words they themselves refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.
3006	22:19	im4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	The word themselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
3007	22:19	da1e			κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς	1	Paul went to the synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue”
3008	22:20	y7t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	Here, blood stands for Stephen’s life. To spill blood means to kill. Alternate translation: “your witness Stephen was killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3009	22:20	udrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3010	22:22	fj9x			αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1	Here both instances of the words him refer to Paul.
3011	22:22	ta8z			αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	The phrase from the earth adds emphasis to “Remove such a one.” Alternate translation: “Kill him”
3012	22:23	ylr7			κραυγαζόντων τε αὐτῶν	1	The phrase as they were is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.
3013	22:23	b6a7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα	1	These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3014	22:24	x7zv			χιλίαρχος	1	The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
3015	22:24	h6gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3016	22:24	sth6			τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
3017	22:24	pz47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. Alternate translation: “ordering that Paul be whipped to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3018	22:24	og3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3019	22:25	ar63			προέτειναν	1	Here the word they refers to the soldiers.
3020	22:25	st4k			τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν	1	The whip was made from strips of leather or animal hide.
3021	22:25	yjw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν?	1	Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3022	22:26	pca7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3023	22:27	pe31			αὐτῷ & ὁ	1	Here the words him and he refer to Paul.
3024	22:27	e69y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προσελθὼν & ὁ χιλίαρχος	1	Here, come can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3025	22:28	dr2w			ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome”
3026	22:28	r79c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ & τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word citizenship, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3027	22:28	rly1			ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born. Paul’s father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!”
3028	22:29	ii8p			οἱ μέλλοντες & ἀνετάζειν	1	Alternate translation: “the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question”
3029	22:30	g33i			κατηγορεῖται & ἔλυσεν αὐτόν & ἔστησεν	1	Here the first occurrence of the word he refers to Paul, and the second and third occurrences refer to the chief captain. Both occurrences of the word him refer to Paul.
3030	22:30	kx58			ἔλυσεν αὐτόν	1	Alternate translation: “the commander ordered his soldiers to untie Paul’s bonds”
3031	22:30	c5ia			καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον	1	From the fortress, there is a stairway going down to the temple courts.
3032	23:intro	gbw5				0	Acts 23 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5. Special concepts in this chapter Resurrection of the dead The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) “Called a curse” Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. Important figures of speech in this chapter Whitewash This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3033	23:1	z2sq			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members (Acts 22:30).
3034	23:1	jru4			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers means “fellow Jews.”
3035	23:1	nn2q			ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας	1	Alternate translation: “I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man”
3036	23:2	yz4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3037	23:3	igq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε	1	This refers to a wall that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3038	23:3	un7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι?	1	Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3039	23:3	m6nb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for strike as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3040	23:4	lkh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς?	1	The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in Acts 23:3. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3041	23:5	e8lg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3042	23:5	veqe			ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς	1	Paul quotes from the writings of Moses.
3043	23:6	pbe1			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers means “fellow Jews.”
3044	23:6	as3f			υἱὸς Φαρισαίων	1	Here, son means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”
3045	23:6	ys5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3046	23:6	iz18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you can express the idea as “come back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I have confidence that the dead will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3047	23:6	dchr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use the nominal adjective dead, you can be express it as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3048	23:7	abs3			ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος	1	Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another”
3049	23:8	gl1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ λέγουσιν μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα; Φαρισαῖοι δὲ ὁμολογοῦσιν τὰ ἀμφότερα	1	This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3050	23:9	eaf1			ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη	1	The word so marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. Alternate translation: “So they began shouting loudly at one another”
3051	23:9	ayr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ & πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος	1	The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3052	23:10	dr1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως	1	The phrase a great argument can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3053	23:10	s65i			χιλίαρχος	1	The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
3054	23:10	f568		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3055	23:10	tqhu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	The phrase be torn to pieces might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3056	23:10	man3			ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “to use physical force to take him away”
3057	23:10	ap3c			εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
3058	23:11	i9w5			τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night”
3059	23:11	r4q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι	1	The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “to bear witness about me in Rome” or “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3060	23:12	fm3y			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.
3061	23:12	klb4			ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν	1	They formed this conspiracy for the purpose of killing Paul. Alternate translation: “having organized a group with a shared purpose”
3062	23:12	g3sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς	1	It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3063	23:13	f1u2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τεσσεράκοντα οἱ	1	Alternate translation: “forty men who had become part of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3064	23:13	u5s5			οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι	1	Alternate translation: “who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul”
3065	23:14	zb6w			οἵτινες	1	Here the word They refers to the forty Jews in Acts 23:13.
3066	23:14	ur73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον	1	To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3067	23:15	tuao		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς & ὑμᾶς & μέλλοντας	1	All instances of you are plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3068	23:15	u8xm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Here, we refers to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3069	23:15	w418			νῦν οὖν	1	Alternate translation: “Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse”
3070	23:15	q9e6			νῦν	1	Here, Now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
3071	23:15	q9mb			καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	Alternate translation: “the commander will bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you”
3072	23:15	m133			ὡς μέλλοντας διαγινώσκειν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done”
3073	23:16	w6fe			ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου	1	Alternate translation: “the son of Paul’s sister” or “Paul’s nephew”
3074	23:16	pj5h			ἀκούσας & τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	Alternate translation: “hearing that they were ready to ambush Paul” or “finding out that they were waiting to kill Paul”
3075	23:16	a5hx			τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
3076	23:17	d7cy			ἔχει & αὐτῷ	1	Here the word he refers to Paul’s nephew. The word him refers to the chief captain.
3077	23:18	abd0			ὁ μὲν οὖν παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	Alternate translation: “So taking the young man, the centurion brought him”
3078	23:18	lzf3			ὁ δέσμιος, Παῦλος, προσκαλεσάμενός με	1	Alternate translation: “The prisoner named Paul after he asked me to come talk with him”
3079	23:18	ju2b			τοῦτον τὸν νεανίαν	1	Since the chief captain calls him a young man, this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
3080	23:20	uv6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο	1	Here, the Jews does not mean all Jews, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3081	23:20	wp5d			Παῦλον καταγάγῃς	1	Alternate translation: “you would bring Paul down from the fortress”
3082	23:20	fev5			ὡς μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ.	1	Alternate translation: “pretending they want to learn more about what Paul has done”
3083	23:21	i2k9			ἐνεδρεύουσιν & αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “are ready to ambush Paul” or “are waiting to kill Paul”
3084	23:21	r695			οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν	1	Alternate translation: “who have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do”
3085	23:23	wk7k			προσκαλεσάμενός	1	Alternate translation: “having called to himself”
3086	23:23	mgi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δεξιολάβους διακοσίους	1	Alternate translation: “two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3087	23:23	kg8s			τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός	1	This was about 9:00 PM.
3088	23:24	av3h			Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα	1	Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the Roman governor of the area.
3089	23:25	vg8x			General Information:	0	General Information: The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul.
3090	23:26	vg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας & Φήλικι	1	Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3091	23:26	zf93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3092	23:26	yk79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3093	23:26	u2ih			τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	Alternate translation: “to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors”
3094	23:27	zr7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here, the Jews means “some of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “This man was seized by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3095	23:27	yy0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3096	23:27	ha13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3097	23:27	v78t			ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐξειλάμην	1	Alternate translation: “I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were and I rescued him”
3098	23:28	lb1a			κατήγαγον	1	Here the word I refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain.
3099	23:28	lb1b			ἐνεκάλουν αὐτῷ	1	The word they refers to the group of Jews who accused Paul.
3100	23:29	zt4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I learned that they were accusing him about things in their own law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3101	23:29	wsh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words accusation, death, and imprisonment, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3102	23:30	lb1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σέ	1	The word you is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3103	23:30	i2ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης δέ μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when I later learned that there was a plot to kill this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3104	23:30	pmq7			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.
3105	23:31	ifs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα	1	Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3106	23:31	s9rf			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.
3107	23:31	ny4k			οἱ & οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	The word So marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the commander’s ordering the soldiers to escort Paul.
3108	23:31	ptv4			ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς	1	Here, brought can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “they got Paul and took him at night”
3109	23:32	abd1			ὑπέστρεψαν	1	Here, they refers to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.
3110	23:33	abx1			οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες	1	Here, they refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
3111	23:34	u44w			ἀναγνοὺς & ἐστὶν & ἀπὸ	1	Here the first he refers to Governor Felix, and the second and third occurrences of he refer to Paul.
3112	23:34	dtx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3113	23:35	dwv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔφη	1	This sentence, which begins with the words “When he learned” in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Paul said, ‘I am from Cilicia.’ Then the governor said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3114	23:35	uji1			διακούσομαί σου	1	Alternate translation: “I will listen to all you have to say”
3115	23:35	mga2			κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having commanded soldiers to keep him” or “and commanded soldiers to restrain him”
3116	24:intro	j74u				0	Acts 24 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do. Special concepts in this chapter Respect Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2-4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Governmental leaders The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3117	24:1	bc8k			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.
3118	24:1	e8rp			μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας	1	Alternate translation: “And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea”
3119	24:1	n9gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. See how you translated this in Acts 23:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3120	24:1	f3vx			ῥήτορος	1	Alternate translation: Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. “a lawyer”
3121	24:1	xm6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τερτύλλου τινός	1	Tertullus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3122	24:1	q7wj			κατέβη	1	Alternate translation: “went to Caesarea where Paul was”
3123	24:1	nq9x			τῷ ἡγεμόνι	1	Alternate translation: “in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court”
3124	24:1	zm5e			ἐνεφάνισαν τῷ ἡγεμόνι κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου	1	Alternate translation: “came there to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law”
3125	24:2	e6zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες	1	Here, we refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3126	24:2	qw1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σοῦ & σῆς	1	Here the words you and your refers to Felix, the governor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3127	24:2	sv8c			καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας	1	Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation”
3128	24:3	r5jl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word thankfulness, you could express the same idea with an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3129	24:3	q3fj			κράτιστε Φῆλιξ	1	Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 23:25. Alternate translation: “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor”
3130	24:4	tyq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	μὴ & ἐνκόπτω	1	The word we refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3131	24:4	jww2			ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω	1	This could mean: (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you”
3132	24:4	xfm5			ἀκοῦσαί & ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “kindly listen to my short speech”
3133	24:5	i1qs			εὑρόντες & τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν	1	Alternate translation: “we have learned that Paul is always causing trouble”
3134	24:5	k1v1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	The word all here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3135	24:5	zg4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρωτοστάτην & τῆς τῶν Ναζωραίων αἱρέσεως	1	The phrase the sect of the Nazarenes is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: “he leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3136	24:5	n6zb			αἱρέσεως	1	A sect is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.
3137	24:8	ujn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	δυνήσῃ αὐτὸς	1	Here the word you is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3138	24:8	e26a			ἐπιγνῶναι ὧν ἡμεῖς κατηγοροῦμεν αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “to learn that we are bringing very serious charges against him” or “to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things of which we are accusing him”
3139	24:8	xkr4			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.
3140	24:9	rq5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders who were at Paul’s trial. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3141	24:10	ict8			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
3142	24:10	s92a			νεύσαντος & τοῦ ἡγεμόνος	1	Alternate translation: “and the governor gestured”
3143	24:10	uu7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ	1	Here, this nation refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3144	24:10	sr5t			εὐθύμως & ἀπολογοῦμαι	1	Alternate translation: “I gladly explain my situation”
3145	24:12	my1c			εὗρόν	1	Here the word they refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.
3146	24:12	wbf6			ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου	1	Alternate translation: “and I did not provoke the crowd to rebel against Rome”
3147	24:14	c5xa			ὁμολογῶ & τοῦτό σοι	1	Alternate translation: “I acknowledge this to you”
3148	24:14	k79p			ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	The phrase the Way was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time.
3149	24:14	rqu3			λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν	1	A sect is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated sect in Acts 24:5.
3150	24:14	cg73			οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses the phrase in that way to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a sect or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion.
3151	24:15	nv5a			καὶ αὐτοὶ	1	Here, these men refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. Alternate translation: “the same as these men”
3152	24:15	qza8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3153	24:15	x1yd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	These nominal adjectives refer to righteous people and unrighteous people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3154	24:16	sfw4			αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ & διὰ παντός	1	Alternate translation: “I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best”
3155	24:16	kcg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here, conscience refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless before God” or “to always do what is right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3156	24:16	va3b			πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	Alternate translation: “in the presence of God”
3157	24:17	p92m			δὲ	1	The word Now marks a shift in Paul’s argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.
3158	24:17	py9v			δι’ ἐτῶν & πλειόνων	1	Alternate translation: “after many years away from Jerusalem”
3159	24:17	ryk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου, παρεγενόμην καὶ προσφοράς	1	Here, I came can be translated as “I went.” Alternate translation: “I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift to the poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3160	24:18	pk2m			ἡγνισμένον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Alternate translation: “in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself”
3161	24:18	x6iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, οὐδὲ μετὰ θορύβου	1	You can state this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3162	24:20	ag5d			αὐτοὶ	1	Here, these refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial.
3163	24:20	hnt9			αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα	1	Alternate translation: “let these men prove what I did wrong”
3164	24:21	ds1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you can express the same idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3165	24:21	d2lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3166	24:22	w1tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὁ Φῆλιξ	1	Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3167	24:22	a87f			τῆς Ὁδοῦ	1	Here, the Way is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in Acts 9:2.
3168	24:22	k1f7			Λυσίας	1	Lysias is the name of the commander. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:26.
3169	24:22	z5f9			καταβῇ	1	Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming down from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “may come down from Jerusalem”
3170	24:22	ldi8			διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	Alternate translation: “I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty”
3171	24:23	sxy2			ἔχειν & ἄνεσιν	1	Alternate translation: “to grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners”
3172	24:24	wus4			μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς	1	Alternate translation: “But after several days”
3173	24:24	qy9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δρουσίλλῃ, τῇ ἰδίᾳ γυναικὶ	1	Drusilla is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3174	24:24	xmq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ	1	A Jewess refers to a female Jew. Alternate translation: “who was a Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3175	24:25	b8v1			ἔμφοβος γενόμενος, ὁ Φῆλιξ	1	Felix may have been frightened because he felt conviction of his sins.
3176	24:25	p8yi			τὸ νῦν ἔχον	1	Alternate translation: “Leave me for a while”
3177	24:26	h4v7			χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	Felix was hoping Paul would offer him a bribe to set him free.
3178	24:26	n45p			διὸ καὶ πυκνότερον αὐτὸν μεταπεμπόμενος, ὡμίλει αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “and so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul”
3179	24:27	ur2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἔλαβεν διάδοχον ὁ Φῆλιξ Πόρκιον Φῆστον	1	Porcius Festus was the new roman governor who succeeded Felix. Alternate translation: “Porcius Festus replaced Felix as the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3180	24:27	p59c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	θέλων & χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting the Jewish leaders to like him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3181	24:27	gln6			ὁ Φῆλιξ & κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον	2	Alternate translation: “Felix kept Paul in prison”
3182	25:intro	b6uk				0	Acts 25 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Favor This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
3183	25:1	c84u			Φῆστος	1	Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 24:27.
3184	25:1	w8h3			οὖν	1	The word then marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
3185	25:1	i7t9			Φῆστος & ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ	1	This could mean: (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
3186	25:1	zz4l			ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας	1	The phrase went up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
3187	25:2	uj5p			παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν	1	Here the word him refers to Festus.
3188	25:3	w8um			χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word him refers to Paul.
3189	25:3	qz46			ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”
3190	25:3	pg8x			ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	They were going to ambush Paul on the way to Jerusalem.
3191	25:4	v5f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3192	25:5	a54h			οἱ οὖν ἐν ὑμῖν, φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες	1	Alternate translation: “He said, ‘Therefore, your leaders should go to Caesarea with us and”
3193	25:5	iz98			εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον	1	Alternate translation: “If Paul has done anything wrong”
3194	25:5	nei6			κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”
3195	25:6	fi27			διατρίψας & καταβὰς & ἐκέλευσεν & ἀχθῆναι	1	Here all occurrences of the word he and him refer to Festus.
3196	25:6	s69c			καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
3197	25:6	qv24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Here, judgment seat refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3198	25:6	j7c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3199	25:7	v4v8			παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “And when he came and stood before Festus”
3200	25:7	e7g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες	1	Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3201	25:8	hc3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem temple. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3202	25:9	b49x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	Here, the Jews means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3203	25:9	qe8h			εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς	1	Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
3204	25:9	wi2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3205	25:10	u1ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	The judgment seat refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3206	25:10	p78y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Roman authority is already judging me, and they are the only ones who should judge me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3207	25:11	el9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3208	25:11	m49r			Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι	1	Connecting Statement: Paul asks to be taken before Caesar for judgment.
3209	25:11	ta55			ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι	1	Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”
3210	25:11	hxr1			εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου	1	Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true”
3211	25:11	hr23			οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	This could mean: (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.
3212	25:11	b1bf			Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι	1	Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me”
3213	25:12	t96z			μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου	1	This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as council throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”
3214	25:13	izu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη	1	King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
3215	25:13	q0sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη	1	Agrippa is a man and Bernice is a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3216	25:13	c3gc			δὲ	1	This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
3217	25:13	ukd3			ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον	1	Alternate translation: “to make a formal visit to greet Festus”
3218	25:14	ge5h			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
3219	25:14	x8jf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3220	25:14	z7yw			Φήλικος	1	Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24.
3221	25:15	b6hx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περὶ οὗ & ἐνεφάνισαν	1	To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3222	25:15	hyp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word judgment, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3223	25:16	e4tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον	1	Here, hand over represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3224	25:16	xjb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους	1	Here, have his accusers face to face is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3225	25:17	z6g2			οὖν	1	Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
3226	25:17	rm5z			συνελθόντων & ἐνθάδε	1	Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here”
3227	25:17	efe2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Here, judgment seat refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3228	25:17	hm6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3229	25:19	d1qm			τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας	1	Here, religion means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
3230	25:20	y9bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for me to judge him there concerning these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3231	25:21	ie7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3232	25:21	ceq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3233	25:22	t322		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase he says can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
3234	25:23	y1yj			τοῦ Ἀγρίππα καὶ τῆς Βερνίκης	1	Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in Acts 25:13.
3235	25:23	yw76			μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας	1	Alternate translation: “with a great ceremony to honor them”
3236	25:23	ldb7			τὸ ἀκροατήριον	1	This hall was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
3237	25:23	at4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3238	25:24	n8qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	The word all is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3239	25:24	yv2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3240	25:25	f6hy			αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	Alternate translation: “but because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”
3241	25:25	g856			τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	The emperor was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
3242	25:26	fe2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμῶν & σοῦ	1	Here the first you is plural and probably refers to “King Agrippa, and all who are present with us” in 25:24. The second you is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3243	25:26	jcq2			προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα	1	Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”
3244	25:26	rhy2			ὅπως & σχῶ τι γράψω	1	Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write”
3245	25:27	txs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι	1	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative unreasonable … not, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3246	25:27	xm65			τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας	1	This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.
3247	26:intro	e2q6				0	Acts 26 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22) Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that. Special concepts in this chapter Light and darkness The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
3248	26:1	b34d			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
3249	26:1	gz9f			Ἀγρίππας	1	Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in Acts 25:13.
3250	26:1	wme6			ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα	1	Alternate translation: “holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand”
3251	26:1	vni8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπελογεῖτο	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word defense, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3252	26:2	ha47			ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον	1	Paul said he was blessed because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
3253	26:2	xhz1			ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	Alternate translation: “to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges”
3254	26:2	mdq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3255	26:2	cbr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαίων	1	Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3256	26:3	kns2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζητημάτων	1	You can make explicit what kinds of controversies Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3257	26:4	t8bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This is a generalization. This could mean: (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3258	26:4	x96h			ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου	1	This could mean: (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.
3259	26:5	y9a1			τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας	1	Alternate translation: “a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”
3260	26:6	s9kr			νῦν	1	The word Now marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
3261	26:6	i9y5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕστηκα κρινόμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3262	26:6	r42g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This speaks about a promise as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “because I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3263	26:7	hnf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν & ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	The phrase our 12 tribes stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “which is also what our fellow Jews in the 12 tribes are waiting for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3264	26:7	apf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς ἣν & ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3265	26:7	kzg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον	1	The extremes night and day mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3266	26:7	c4lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3267	26:8	de83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει?	1	Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3268	26:8	ukk6			νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”
3269	26:9	hm33			μὲν οὖν	1	Paul uses the word Then to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.
3270	26:9	r4df		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ & ἐναντία	1	The word name here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3271	26:10	nys7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state the phrase were being put to death in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3272	26:11	rri6			πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	This could mean: (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.
3273	26:12	us8d			ἐν οἷς	1	Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
3274	26:12	h3ic			ἐν οἷς	1	The word While is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
3275	26:12	ajp6			μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς	1	Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
3276	26:14	sip5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με	1	Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3277	26:14	du3t			Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις?	1	This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
3278	26:14	zsi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or goad) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3279	26:18	fk1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν	1	Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone to open their eyes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3280	26:18	gw8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς	1	Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of light. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3281	26:18	q3h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ & τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	Helping someone to stop obeying Satan and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3282	26:18	m65i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3283	26:18	m9ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κλῆρον	1	The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3284	26:18	c5ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3285	26:18	bgc5			πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me”
3286	26:19	ljx2			ὅθεν	1	Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
3287	26:19	zv2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not disobedient, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3288	26:19	sn4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	This refers to what the person in the vision told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3289	26:20	fei4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3290	26:20	h1v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3291	26:21	tl6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here, the Jews does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3292	26:22	t8f4			μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ	1	Here, small and great are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism)
3293	26:22	f6py			οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν	1	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “the same thing that”
3294	26:22	i9ki			ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται	1	Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament prophets.
3295	26:23	pe9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός	1	You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3296	26:23	p9t8			ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	Alternate translation: “to be brought back to life”
3297	26:23	sc5f			νεκρῶν	1	The phrase the dead refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
3298	26:23	z2ms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3299	26:24	dvn2			μαίνῃ	1	Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”
3300	26:24	tk27			τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει	1	Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy”
3301	26:25	dur9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μαίνομαι & ἀλλὰ	1	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not insane, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3302	26:25	a6pb			κράτιστε Φῆστε	1	Alternate translation: “Festus, who deserves highest honors”
3303	26:26	ed7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν & αὐτὸν	1	Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3304	26:26	cs7b			παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ	1	Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence”
3305	26:26	svn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πείθομαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3306	26:26	xqr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ & οὐθέν; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	Paul uses two negative phrases to emphasize that the events of Jesus’ life were well-known. Alternate translation: “he is well-aware of these things, because they were done openly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3307	26:26	tta8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3308	26:26	v1uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	2	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3309	26:26	i5wg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν γωνίᾳ	1	This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in a corner of a room where no one could see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3310	26:27	a4a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις?	1	Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3311	26:28	y8qq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι	1	Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3312	26:29	k7kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων	1	Here, these chains stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3313	26:30	k7jh			ἥ & Βερνίκη	1	Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa (Acts 25:13).
3314	26:30	u8vl			ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν	1	Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”
3315	26:31	blz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word death, you can express the same idea with the verb “die.” Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3316	26:31	dwyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	Here, chains stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3317	26:32	n293		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3318	27:intro	r82x				0	Acts 27 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Sailing People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible. Trust Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]]) Paul breaks bread Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
3319	27:1	dyf5			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
3320	27:1	b2yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐκρίθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3321	27:1	yv84			εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	Italy was the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated Italy in Acts 18:2.
3322	27:1	s6ny			παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	Alternate translation: “they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”
3323	27:1	k52u			παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας	1	This could mean: (1) they refers to the governor and the king or (2) they refers to other Roman officials.
3324	27:1	un2s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ	1	Julius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3325	27:1	d22f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	The Augustan regiment was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3326	27:2	efe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3327	27:2	dnr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπιβάντες & πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	Here, a ship … being about to sail stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3328	27:2	tol6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀνήχθημεν & ἡμῖν	1	The words we and us include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3329	27:2	fqy2			πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	This could mean: (1) a ship that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
3330	27:2	f8pf			μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon”
3331	27:2	m3ps			ἀνήχθημεν	1	Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea”
3332	27:2	h3uy			Ἀριστάρχου	1	Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in Acts 19:29.
3333	27:3	r71e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κατήχθημεν	1	Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3334	27:3	u6lt			φιλανθρώπως & ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος	1	See how you translated Julius in Acts 27:1. Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern”
3335	27:3	rp73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word care, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3336	27:4	d4hg			ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν	1	Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under”
3337	27:4	mjt8			ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον	1	Here, under Cyprus means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course.
3338	27:5	g1t7			Παμφυλίαν	1	Pamphylia was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
3339	27:5	y6m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας	1	You can make explicit that they got off the ship in Myra. Alternate translation: “we came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3340	27:5	ni2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	εἰς Μύρρα	1	Myra is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3341	27:5	uaf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Λυκίας	1	Lycia was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3342	27:6	j4cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὑρὼν & πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “having found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3343	27:6	fdq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρῖνον	1	Alexandria is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3344	27:7	zzw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δὲ & βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι	1	You can make explicit that the reason they were sailing slowly and with difficulty was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3345	27:7	pye5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον	1	Cnidus was an ancient settlement located in what today is modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3346	27:7	hhf1			μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου	1	Alternate translation: “with a strong wind blowing against us so we could no longer go that way”
3347	27:7	b746			ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην	1	Alternate translation: “we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”
3348	27:7	mq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κατὰ Σαλμώνην	1	Salmone is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3349	27:8	p4ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μόλις & παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν	1	You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3350	27:8	a64y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Καλοὺς Λιμένας	1	Fair Havens was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3351	27:8	n7re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	πόλις ἦν Λασαία	1	Lasea was a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3352	27:9	ea4l			ἱκανοῦ & χρόνου διαγενομένου	1	Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
3353	27:9	u6x5			ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι	1	This fast took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
3354	27:10	p29v			θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας & μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν	1	Alternate translation: “if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”
3355	27:10	nx9c			ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν	1	Here, loss means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
3356	27:10	q9xt			οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου	1	The word cargo refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”
3357	27:11	b1kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3358	27:12	l2n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνευθέτου & τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν	1	You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “because the harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3359	27:12	jmi3			λιμένος	1	A harbor is a place on the coast that is protected from wind and waves so that ships can safely stay there.
3360	27:12	k2ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοίνικα	1	Phoenix is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3361	27:12	z1lf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραχειμάσαι	1	This speaks about the season of winter as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3362	27:12	x6vl			βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	This means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”
3363	27:12	gyd2			κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. The southwest is a little to the left of the setting sun, and northwest is a little to the right of the setting sun.
3364	27:13	xx67			ἄραντες	1	Here, weighed anchor means to pull the anchor out of the water. An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.
3365	27:14	m2xe			μετ’ οὐ πολὺ	1	Alternate translation: “after a little while”
3366	27:14	fs4z			ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς	1	Alternate translation: “a very strong, dangerous wind”
3367	27:14	g1ek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων	1	The word for northeaster in the original language is Euroclydon. You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
3368	27:14	tz2k			ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”
3369	27:15	fxp1			συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	Alternate translation: “And when the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”
3370	27:15	w1hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3371	27:16	c4cg			νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες	1	Alternate translation: “sailing where the wind was not so strong, on the side of the island”
3372	27:16	aq56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	νησίον & τι & καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	This island of Cauda was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3373	27:16	h9z2			τῆς σκάφης	1	A lifeboat is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.
3374	27:17	v9ag			ἣν ἄραντες	1	Alternate translation: “When they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “After they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”
3375	27:17	tx1f			βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον	1	They tied ropes around the bottom of the ship so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
3376	27:17	dvv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	Syrtis is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3377	27:17	l8kl			χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος	1	A sea anchor was a sail or other object that would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow down the ship from going where the wind was blowing them.
3378	27:17	g7rw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφέροντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they had to go in whatever direction the wind blew them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3379	27:18	fx4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since the wind blew us roughly back and forth so that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3380	27:18	nd5h			ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο	1	Here, they is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
3381	27:18	ny6k			ἐκβολὴν	1	The word cargo refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in Acts 27:10. Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”
3382	27:19	vm2k			αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν	1	Here, equipment refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
3383	27:20	if7a			μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	They could not see the sun and stars because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
3384	27:20	p2wd			χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου	1	Alternate translation: “as the terrible storm blew us roughly back and forth”
3385	27:20	mnj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped believing we would survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3386	27:21	d1le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	It is implied that neither the sailors, nor Luke, Paul, and those with them had eaten anything. Alternate translation: “And when we had gone a long time without food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3387	27:21	zns2			ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	Alternate translation: “in the middle of the people on the ship”
3388	27:21	bc1x			κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν	1	Alternate translation: “and as a result to suffer this harm and loss”
3389	27:22	d95r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3390	27:22	djh4			πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	Here “loss” is implied. Alternate translation: “but the only thing that will be lost is the ship”
3391	27:24	z1j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι	1	The phrase stand before Caesar refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3392	27:24	s3wv			κεχάρισταί σοι & πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”
3393	27:25	r9t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3394	27:26	vmp6			εἰς νῆσον & τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “the ship is going to be wrecked on some island”
3395	27:27	rrm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο	1	The ordinal number fourteenth can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3396	27:27	la7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαφερομένων ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3397	27:27	afs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ	1	The Adriatic Sea is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3398	27:28	ruj1			βολίσαντες	1	They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water”
3399	27:28	tq53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι & εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3400	27:29	b1qc			ἀγκύρας	1	An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
3401	27:29	q4am			ἐκ πρύμνης	1	Alternate translation: “from the back of the ship”
3402	27:30	b4wv			τὴν σκάφην	1	A lifeboat is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in Acts 27:16.
3403	27:30	rr89			ἐκ πρῴρης	1	Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship”
3404	27:31	ez5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative unless … not able, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3405	27:31	br71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	Here the word you is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3406	27:31	sz8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	If your language does not use the passive form be saved in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3407	27:33	q3y8			ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι	1	Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise”
3408	27:33	j5yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν	1	The ordinal number fourteenth can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3409	27:34	j3qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3410	27:35	yh7y			κλάσας	1	Alternate translation: “after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread”
3411	27:36	zt9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3412	27:37	ynq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	This is background information about the number of people on the ship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3413	27:39	vdk2			κόλπον	1	A bay is a large area of water partly surrounded by land, but open to a larger body of water.
3414	27:39	r1bx			τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον	1	Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”
3415	27:40	k66v			τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων	1	Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”
3416	27:40	ntr9			τῶν πηδαλίων	1	These rudders were large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering the ship.
3417	27:40	cn2w			τὸν ἀρτέμωνα	1	A “sail” was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. A foresail is the said at the front of a ship that had more than one sail. Alternate translation: “the sail at the front of the ship”
3418	27:40	pa1k			κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν	1	Alternate translation: “they steered the ship toward the beach”
3419	27:41	y22n			περιπεσόντες & εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον	1	Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships.
3420	27:41	cpu5			πρῷρα	1	Alternate translation: “front of the ship”
3421	27:41	v35z			ἡ & πρύμνα	2	Alternate translation: “the back of the ship”
3422	27:42	qul7			τῶν & στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο	1	Alternate translation: “the soldiers were planning”
3423	27:43	s2sz			ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος	1	Alternate translation: “kept them from doing what they planned to do”
3424	27:43	br8u			ἀπορίψαντας	1	Alternate translation: “having jumped off the ship into the water”
3425	27:44	hw7p			οὓς & ἐπὶ σανίσιν	1	Alternate translation: “some on wooden boards”
3426	28:intro	w8yn				0	Acts 28 General Notes Structure and formatting No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years. Special concepts in this chapter “Letters” and “brothers” The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming. When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “He was a god” The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
3427	28:1	p1bd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τότε ἐπέγνωμεν	1	Here the word we refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3428	28:1	twx8			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
3429	28:1	j1yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ διασωθέντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when we had arrived safely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3430	28:1	f8y4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται	1	Malta is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3431	28:2	e7w6			οἵ & βάρβαροι	1	Alternate translation: “the local people”
3432	28:2	v8yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν	1	Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3433	28:2	r7jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν	1	This phrase is uses a negative to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3434	28:2	z9cp			ἅψαντες & πυρὰν	1	Alternate translation: “when they put together twigs and branches and burned them”
3435	28:2	itw2			προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς	1	This could mean: (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”
3436	28:3	g4ad			ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα	1	Alternate translation: “a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire”
3437	28:3	xmx4			καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”
3438	28:4	ye7h			πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	Alternate translation: “For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”
3439	28:4	ma1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ δίκη	1	The word justice refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3440	28:5	q5i3			ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ	1	Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”
3441	28:5	asr8			ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν	1	Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all”
3442	28:6	m11i			πίμπρασθαι	1	This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.
3443	28:6	i6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον	1	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative nothing unusual, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3444	28:6	u81u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μεταβαλόμενοι	1	To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3445	28:6	cfe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3446	28:6	d1rj			ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.
3447	28:7	f4sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἐξένισεν	1	Here both instance of the word us refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3448	28:7	r95r			ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον	1	Now is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
3449	28:7	wx6t			τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου	1	This could mean: (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
3450	28:7	wh2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ	1	Publius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3451	28:8	g12t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι	1	This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3452	28:8	m154		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3453	28:8	fr46			δυσεντερίῳ	1	“Dysentery” is an infectious intestinal disease.
3454	28:8	pwk5			ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “having touched him with his hands”
3455	28:9	yk6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθεραπεύοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3456	28:10	ydg4			πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς	1	Probably they honored Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
3457	28:11	qi6e			παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ	1	Alternate translation: “that the crew left at the island for the cold season”
3458	28:11	cm2t			ἐν πλοίῳ & Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ	1	This could mean: this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
3459	28:11	jc5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Διοσκούροις	1	The Heavenly Twins refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3460	28:12	w5c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συρακούσας	1	Syracuse is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3461	28:13	z2u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥήγιον	1	Rhegium was a port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3462	28:13	p633			ἐπιγενομένου νότου	1	Alternate translation: “when the wind began to blow from the south”
3463	28:13	tz4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποτιόλους	1	Puteoli is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3464	28:14	m1is			οὗ εὑρόντες ἀδελφοὺς	1	Alternate translation: “When we met fellow believers there”
3465	28:14	n3tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὺς	1	These brothers were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3466	28:14	a2c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθημεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3467	28:14	bc3j			καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν	1	Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey to Rome was on land. Alternate translation: “and after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome” or “and so our trip ended as we arrived in Rome”
3468	28:15	k754			ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “after they heard why we were there”
3469	28:15	m9tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος	1	Here, courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “thanked God and was encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3470	28:15	se8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀππίου Φόρου & Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν	1	Forum of Appius and Three Taverns were a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3471	28:16	hf2t			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
3472	28:16	fib2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἰσήλθομεν	1	Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3473	28:16	te8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ μένειν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to stay by himself instead of in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3474	28:17	vf7r			ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
3475	28:17	d77z			τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους	1	These were the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
3476	28:17	e1dd			ἀδελφοί	1	Here brothers means “fellow Jews.”
3477	28:17	g55i			ἐναντίον & τῷ λαῷ	1	Alternate translation: “against our people” or “against the Jews”
3478	28:17	hgk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγώ & δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3479	28:17	x3r2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	Here, hands stands for power or control. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3480	28:18	fed7			τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί	1	Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”
3481	28:19	lr96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here, the Jews does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3482	28:19	zk8f			ἀντιλεγόντων	1	Alternate translation: “complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”
3483	28:19	n6vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3484	28:19	e7gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν	1	Here, my nation stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3485	28:20	b1fd			τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	This could mean: (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.
3486	28:20	pgr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	Here, bound with this chain stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3487	28:20	n3s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here, Israel stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3488	28:21	x5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Here, We refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: Acts 28:17 and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3489	28:21	y4bx			οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Here, brothers stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “and none of our fellow Jews have come”
3490	28:22	kw1d			τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης	1	A sect is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “this group to which you belong”
3491	28:22	gy8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3492	28:22	j12v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3493	28:23	u7pc			ταξάμενοι & οἷς & αὐτοὺς	1	Here all occurrences of the words they and them refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
3494	28:23	q4iv			ταξάμενοι & αὐτῷ ἡμέραν	1	Alternate translation: “when they had chosen a time for him to speak to them”
3495	28:23	dg5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, kingdom of God stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “telling them about God’s rule as king” or “telling them how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3496	28:23	peu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here, the prophets refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3497	28:24	pmd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And Paul was able to convince some of them by what he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3498	28:25	n7pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν	1	Here, word stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3499	28:25	b11n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3500	28:26	t5dq			πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	In this verse, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.
3501	28:26	qj7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3502	28:26	pax8			ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε & βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	The words hear and see are repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: “When you listen you will hear … when you look you will see”
3503	28:26	s1ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3504	28:27	fz42			General Information:	0	General Information: Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in Acts 28:25-26.
3505	28:27	ts5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3506	28:27	ngve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ καρδία	1	Here, heart is a metonym for the mind. Alternate translation: “the thinking” or “the thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3507	28:27	f5m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will not see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3508	28:27	lr99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν	1	Here, heart stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3509	28:27	q8c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically turning toward God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3510	28:27	vb9f			ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
3511	28:28	b2za		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3512	28:28	e8hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3513	28:28	d18n			αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται	1	This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. Alternate translation: “some of them also will listen”
3514	28:30	c56e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: In verses 30-31, Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
3515	28:31	wv1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, kingdom of God refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3516	10:1	nfy5			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
3517	10:6	lt9n			βυρσεῖ	1	A tanner is a person who makes leather from animal skins.